manualshive.com logo in svg

Canon i-SENSYS MF6140dn, User Manual

Share
Download
Canon i-SENSYS MF6140dn User Manual Download Page 887

0FR4-0LU

Can you
connect your
computer to
the internet?

No

Connect the power cable for the router, etc., the network cables and so forth.
If the power to the router and other devices is turned off, turn it on.

When you cannot connect to the internet even after checking

Restart each device. Wait a short while and then check whether the computer can
connect to the internet.

For the restart procedure, the network connection method and so forth, see the
instruction manual provided with each device, or contact the manufacturer.

YES

Is the
machine's
power turned
ON?

No

Turn ON the machine.

If the machine is already ON

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON.

YES

Is the
machine
connected to
the router or
hub using the
correct LAN
cable?

No

Use a Category 5 or higher twisted pair cable for the LAN.

YES

When
using the
router

Is the LAN
cable for the
machine and
computer
connected to
the router
LAN port?

No

If the cable is connected to the WAN port of the router (or the internet port), connect it to
the LAN port.
If the LAN cable is loose, connect it properly.

For instructions on how to connect, refer to the instruction manual of the router
you are using, or contact the manufacturer.

YES

Is the wired
LAN set to
the
wired/wireless
LAN
machine?

No

Select <Wired LAN> under <Select Wired/Wireless LAN> > in Network Settings.

"Switching the Connection Method to Wireless LAN or Wired LAN (MF6180dw
Only)"

Checking Network Connection (Wired LAN)

㻤㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠

Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals

Summary of Contents for i-SENSYS MF6140dn

Page 1: ...㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 2: ...roup Dialing 65 Toner Cartridges 76 Supplied Toner Cartridge 77 About Replacement Toner Cartridges 78 Handling Toner Cartridges 79 Storing Toner Cartridges 81 Using the Toner Saver Mode 82 Purchasing Consumables 84 Placing Documents 85 Placing Documents on the Platen Glass 86 Attention Placing Documents on the Platen Glass 88 Placing Documents in the Feeder 89 Attention Placing Documents in the Fe...

Page 3: ...te 150 Initializing the Address Book 152 Initializing the System Management Settings 154 Summary of Reports and Lists 156 Printing the Report Automatically 157 Fax Send Results Report 158 E Mail Windows SMB Send Results Report 160 Communication Management 162 Receive Results 164 Printing List 166 Printing the Address Book List 167 Printing the User Data List 169 Printing System Manager Data List 1...

Page 4: ...n ID Card Copy 235 Copying by Saving Paper 236 Collating Copies 239 Erasing Dark Borders and Frame Lines Frame Erase 241 Emphasizing the Outline of the Image Sharpness 243 Registering and Using Combination of Copy Settings Mode Memory 245 Registering Mode Memory 246 Deleting Mode Memory 248 Calling and Copying Mode Memory 250 Changing the Default Settings 251 Viewing Copy Settings 253 Fax 254 Usin...

Page 5: ...ry 306 One Touch Coded Dial TX Confirmation 307 Restrict Sequential Broadcast 308 Receiving Faxes 309 RX Mode 310 Changing the Receive Mode 313 Advanced Settings for the Fax Tel Auto Switch Mode 314 Forwarding Fax Documents 316 Setting Document Transfer Automatic Forwarding 317 Forwarding Received Faxes Stored in Memory to Other Destinations Manual Forwarding 319 Configurating Operations for Trans...

Page 6: ...d Deleting Print Jobs Checking Print Job History 384 Checking and Canceling Print Jobs 385 Checking Print Job History 387 Changing printer settings Items to Be Specified Using Menu Button 389 Printing Documents from a USB Memory Media Printing 391 Summary of Media Printing 392 Printing Fundamentals USB Memory 393 Selecting a file to print 396 Changing Print Settings 398 Attention Changing Print Se...

Page 7: ...Sender Name 501 Changing the Default Scan Settings for Sending to E mail 503 Sending Scanned Documents to a File Server 505 Preparation for Scanning File Server 506 Scanning Fundamentals File Server 507 Specifying the Destination File Server 510 Changing the Scan Settings File Server 512 Checking Canceling Send Data File Server 518 Changing the Default Settings for Sending to a File Server 520 Net...

Page 8: ...s 612 Setting the WINS Server 613 Setting the SMB 616 Registering LDAP Servers 619 Setting MTU Size 623 Configuring SNTP 625 Configuring SLP Communication with imageWARE 629 Managing the Machine 633 Check Wireless LAN Information MF6180dw Only 634 Checking the MAC Address 638 Security 640 Setting the System Manager Information 641 Attention Specifying the System Manager Information 644 Registering...

Page 9: ...tions and Use the Sending Functions 749 Setting a PIN for the Address Book 750 Restricting Destinations that Can Be Specified 752 Restricting to Send Faxes from Your Computer 754 Restricting Sending from Job History 756 Confirming the Entered Fax Number 758 Confirming Destinations for One Touch Coded Dial TX 760 Restricting Sequential Broadcasts 762 Specifying Display Settings for the Job History ...

Page 10: ...xes Cannot Be Printed or the Images on Printouts Are Spotted or Distorted 869 Copying Problems 870 The Copy Output Is Hardly Readable and Copied Poorly 872 Printing Problems 874 Cannot Print Documents from a Computer 875 Cannot Print over a TCP IP Network 877 Scanning Problems 879 Cannot Scan a Document 881 Telephone Problems 883 Network Problems 884 Wired LAN Troubles 885 Checking Network Connect...

Page 11: ... Images 927 Attention Correcting Copy Images 931 Adjusting the Density 932 Adjusting Black Text in Color Documents Black Text Processing Adjustment in Color Documents 933 Special Mode 935 Relocating the Machine 939 Attention Relocating the Machine 942 Appendix 943 Basic Windows Operations 944 Disclaimers 947 Copyright 948 Trademarks 949 Contact Us 950 For Macintosh Users 951 Using the e Manual 953...

Page 12: ...ended to prevent injuries to you and other persons as well as equipment damage Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious personal injury product damage or improper operation Please follow the instructions in this manual Important Safety Instructions 㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 13: ...llowing safety warnings and precautions before using the machine Installation Power Supply Handling Maintenance and Inspections Consumables Others Important Safety Instructions 㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 14: ...such as on unsteady platforms or inclined floors or in locations subject to excessive vibrations as this may cause the machine to fall or tip over resulting in personal injury The ventilation slots are provided for proper ventilation of working parts inside the machine Never place the machine on a soft surface such as a bed sofa or rug Blocking the slots can cause the machine to overheat resulting...

Page 15: ...y Failure to do so may cause you to drop the machine resulting in personal injury Relocating the Machine Machines with a hard disk may not operate properly when used at high altitudes of about 3 000 meters above sea level or higher 㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 16: ...cord it may damage the power cord or the wires inside the machine may be disconnected This could result in a fire Avoid the following situations Connecting and disconnecting the power cord frequently Tripping over the power cord The power cord is bent near the connection part and continuous stress is being applied to the power outlet or the connection part Applying a shock to the power connector D...

Page 17: ...t and contact your local authorized Canon dealer When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power plug is plugged into an AC power outlet do not touch the metal part of the connector as this can result in electrical shock CAUTION Do not place heavy objects on the machine The object or the machine may fall resulting in personal injury Turn OFF the power switch when the machine will not be use...

Page 18: ...xposure may cause damage to your eyes If you operate this machine in manners other than the control adjustment and operating procedures prescribed in this manual this may result in hazardous radiation exposure This machine is confirmed as the class 1 laser product in IEC60825 1 2007 㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 19: ...oft damp cloth in a way that prevents inhalation Never use a vacuum cleaner that does not have safeguards against dust explosions to clean up spilled toner Doing so may cause a malfunction in the vacuum cleaner or result in a dust explosion due to static discharge Confirm that the power plug or power connector is inserted completely after cleaning the machine Failure to do so can result in an over...

Page 20: ...ins When removing jammed paper be careful not to allow the toner on the paper to scatter The toner may get into your eyes or mouth If toner gets into your eyes or mouth wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician When loading paper or removing jammed documents or paper be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper When removing a toner cartridge remove the toner ca...

Page 21: ...p the toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children If the toner or other parts are ingested consult a physician immediately Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge The toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth If toner gets into your eyes or mouth wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician If toner leaks from the toner cartridge be ...

Page 22: ...pacemaker This machine generates a low level magnetic field If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities please move away from this machine and consult your physician immediately Others 㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 23: ... this reason laser radiation emitted inside this equipment is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover No radiation can leak from the machine in the normal operation of the product by the user This machine is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product under IEC 60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 220 to 240 V Model The label shown below is attached to the laser scan unit on the mach...

Page 24: ...ciated with EEE Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources For more information about the recycling of this product please contact your local city office waste authority approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www canon europe com weee or www canon europe com battery International ENERGY STAR Progra...

Page 25: ...e 1999 5 CE Italiano Italian Con la presente CANON INC dichiara che FM48944 è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Latvian U ãR 121 1 GHNODUƝ ND 0 DWELOVW LUHNWƯYDV EnjWLVNDMƗP SUDVƯEƗP XQ FLWLHP DU WR VDLVWƯWDMLHP QRWHLNXPLHP LHWXYLǐ LWKXDQLDQ âLXR EHQGURYơ Ä 121 1 GHNODUXRMD NDG 0 DWLWLQND SDJULQGLQLXV LUHNW YRMH LãGơV...

Page 26: ...ɧɢɹ ɧɚ Ⱦɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚ ȿɋ Íslenska Icelandic Hér með lýsir CANON INC því yfir að FM48944 sé í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999 5 EC Norsk Norwegian CANON INC erklærer herved at utstyret FM48944 er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Gaeilge Irish Dearbhaíonn CANON INC leis seo go gcloíonn FM48944 le ceanglais riachtanac...

Page 27: ...T LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SI SK 3LH ƯPHV SDU ãƯ L VWUƗGƗMXPD OLHWRãDQX UDQFLMD ãR L VWUƗGƗMXPX QHGUƯNVW OLHWRW ƗUSXV WHOSƗP LHWXYLǐ LWKXDQLDQ âƳ ƳUHQJLQƳ JDOLPD HNVSORDWXRWL 7 6 5 5 HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SI SK 3DVWDED DSLH ãLR SURGXNWR QDXGRMLPą 3UDQFnj LMD ãLR SURGXNWR QHJDOLPD QDXGRWL ODXNH Nederlands Dutch Deze apparatuur kan worden gebruikt in de volgende landen ...

Page 28: ...n Ɍɨɜɚ ɨɛɨɪɭɞɜɚɧɟ ɦɨɠɟ ɞɚ ɫɟ ɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚ ɜ 7 6 5 GB GR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SI SK Ɂɚɛɟɥɟɠɤɚ ɩɨ ɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚɧɟɬɨ ɧɚ ɬɨɡɢ ɩɪɨɞɭɤɬ Ɏɪɚɧɰɢɹ Ɍɨɡɢ ɩɪɨɞɭɤɬ ɧɟ ɦɨɠɟ ɞɚ ɫɟ ɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚ ɢɡɜɴɧ ɬɟɪɢɬɨɪɢɹɬɚ ɧɚ ɮɢɪɦɚɬɚ Íslenska Icelandic Viðgerð á þessu tæki má annast á AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SI SK Tilkynning vegna notkunar vörunnar Fr...

Page 29: ...ation form inside the machine this can result in paper jams or poor print quality When using an ultrasonic humidifier When you are using an ultrasonic humidifier it is therefore recommended that you use purified water or other water that is free of impurities If you use tap water or well water impurities in the water will be dispersed through the air This can be trapped inside the machine causing ...

Page 30: ...tant to provide adequate ventilation A location near equipment that generates magnetic or electromagnetic waves A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur A location exposed to salt air corrosive gases or toxic gases A location such as on a carpet or mat that may warp from the weight of the machine or where the machine is liable to sink Notes on wireless LAN This product is designed f...

Page 31: ...this machine regularly If this machine becomes dusty it may operate improperly Use a modular cable of 3 m or shorter in length Depending on your locale or your telephone connection you may be unable to perform data communication In this case contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line The repairing parts and toner cartridges for the machine will be available for at least seve...

Page 32: ...Loading Paper Setting the paper size and type See Setting the Paper Size and Type Adjusting the volume See Adjusting the Volume Setting the current date and time customizing timer settings See Customizing Timer Settings Customizing display settings See Customizing Display Settings Setting a paper source to be used for each function See Setting a Paper Source to Be Used for Each Function Selecting ...

Page 33: ...ng features available not available Copy 2 sided Print 2 sided Fax PC Fax Scan Send to E mail Store to Shared Folder Remote UI ADF 2 sided Wireless LAN MF6180dw MF6140dn Available Features 㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 34: ... This section describes the parts of the machine and their functions Front Side Back Side Interior Operation Panel LCD Standby Mode Parts and Their Functions 㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 35: ...nel Used to perform various tasks Operation Panel 8 Multi purpose tray You can load paper using the multi purpose tray Load postcards or envelopes here 9 Auxiliary Tray Multi purpose Tray Pull it out and load the paper stack 10 Paper Guides Multi purpose Tray Adjust these guides to fit the document 11 Paper stopper Prevents paper from falling from the output tray 12 Output tray Printed paper such ...

Page 36: ...aper drawer Load paper here 17 Paper Feeder Unit PF 44 drawer 2 It is an optional paper drawer 18 USB memory port Used to save scanned documents in USB memory and to print files saved in USB memory 㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 37: ...Lower rear cover Open this guide to clear paper jams 8 Sub output tray Printed paper is output to the sub output tray with the printed side facing up Printed paper is stacked in reverse page order The sub output tray is suitable for use when printing transparencies labels or envelopes that curl easily because the printed paper remains flat when output 9 Back cover Open this guide to clear paper ja...

Page 38: ...s on 3 Toner guides Used to insert the toner cartridge so that the protrusion on the side of the toner cartridge fits into these guides 4 Duplex unit Used for 2 sided printing and copying 5 Paper size switch lever Used for 2 sided printing Interior 㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 39: ...o scroll up or to increase the value Key Press to scroll down or to decrease the value Key Press to return to the previous screen or move the cursor to the left Press to decrease the volume while the fax ring tone sounds Key Press to proceed to the next screen or move the cursor to the right Press to increase the volume while the fax ring tone sounds OK Key Press to confirm an action or setting Ba...

Page 40: ...multiple documents to copy onto one sheet Stop key Press to cancel jobs Start key Press to start copying scanning sending a fax or USB direct print 7 Error indicator Blinks when an error occurs Processing Data indicator Blinks during transmission and turns on when the machine has waiting jobs MF6180dw only FAX operation panel 1 One touch Speed Dial keys Press to select destinations registered in o...

Page 41: ... 6 R key Press to dial an outside line access number or an extension number when the machine is connected through a switchboard PBX 㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 42: ...y Setting the Auto Reset Timer Copy mode Press to switch to the copy mode screen When the copy mode screen is displayed you can make your selection by using or The currently selected menu item is highlighted Press OK to proceed to the next screen Fax mode Press to switch to fax mode screen When the fax mode screen is displayed you can make your selection by using or The currently selected menu ite...

Page 43: ...ghted Press OK to proceed to the next screen USB Direct Print Mode When using the USB direct print function press to switch to the mode screen When the USB direct print mode screen is displayed you can make your selection by using or The currently selected menu item is highlighted Press OK to proceed to the next screen 㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 44: ... Press Menu to enter the menu screen Scrolling the menu The scroll bar at the right side of the screen indicates that more items are available in the menu To select an item that is not shown on the screen press or to scroll up and down the menu The currently selected item is highlighted with a black background Selecting a menu item Press OK to select the highlighted menu If the menu has a submenu ...

Page 45: ...ny value shown in the parentheses at the bottom of the screen When the numeric key icon is displayed on the screen You can enter it using the numeric keys Entering Text Enter numbers or characters such as a PIN You can enter numbers or characters using the numeric keys Entering Text Confirming the entry To confirm the entered number or character Press OK Select Apply displayed on the screen using ...

Page 46: ...NOTE If you press Menu before you press OK The changes made to the settings are not saved 㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 47: ...de Entry mode Text that can be entered A Alphabet capital letters and symbols a Alphabet small letters and symbols 12 Numbers Entering text symbols and numbers Enter using the numeric keys or Symbols Key Entry mode A Entry mode a Entry mode 12 _ 1 ABC abc 2 DEF def 3 GHI ghi 4 JKL jkl 5 MNO mno 6 PQRS pqrs 7 TUV tuv 8 Entering Text 㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 48: ...To delete all text numbers or symbols press and hold Clear Example Enter CANON 1 Make sure that the entry mode is set to A 2 Press until the letter C appears on the screen 3 Press until the letter A appears on the screen 4 Press until the letter N appears on the screen 5 Press until the letter O appears on the screen 6 Press until the letter N appears on the screen 7 Select Apply using or and pres...

Page 49: ...The entry is complete 㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 50: ...press the appropriate coded dial code to select the destination Registering and Editing Coded Dial Codes Group dialing You can specify up to 199 registered destinations as a group address in one touch keys and coded dial codes Group addresses need to be registered in unused one touch keys or coded dial codes All you need to do is to select a key or code to specify group addresses Registering and E...

Page 51: ...e one touch key press To register a destination for the first time proceed to Step 2 2 Select Register New Destination to Address Book using or and press OK When the address book PIN is selected Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press OK 3 Select One Touch using or and press OK 4 Select Fax or E Mail using or and press OK 5 Select the number to be registered using or and press OK Registeri...

Page 52: ...ng or and press OK 9 Select Destination using or and press OK 10 Use the numeric keys to specify Destination If you select Fax in Step 4 press OK to specify Set Details if necessary 11 Select Apply using or and press OK 12 Select Apply using or and press OK 㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 53: ...nd press OK 3 Select the destination that you want to edit using or and press OK 4 Select the item that you want to edit using or and press OK Type Name Destination One Touch 5 When the edit is complete select Apply using or and press OK 6 Select Apply using or and press OK To delete a one touch key 1 Press 㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 54: ...lect the destination that you want to delete using or and press OK 4 Select Yes using and press OK 3 Press Back to close the menu screen Registering and Editing One Touch Keys using the Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI and log on to the system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Address Book 㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 55: ...e registered one touch key 1 Click No Type or Name 2 Click Edit 3 Specify the required settings in the edit screen and click OK To delete the registered one touch key Click Delete of the destination which you want to delete 㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 56: ...4 Click the unregistered No Type or Name 5 Select Destination Type to Register and click OK 6 Specify the required settings and click OK 㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 57: ...㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 58: ...istered in the coded dial code press To register a destination for the first time proceed to Step 2 2 Select Register New Destination to Address Book using or and press OK When the address book PIN is selected Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press OK 3 Select Coded Dial using or and press OK 4 Select Fax or E Mail using or and press OK 5 Select Name using or and press OK Registering and ...

Page 59: ...d press OK 9 Use the numeric keys to specify Destination If you selected Fax in Step 4 press OK to specify Set Details if necessary 10 Select Apply using or and press OK 11 Select Coded Dial using or and press OK 12 Select the number to be registered using or and press OK 㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 60: ...e the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press OK 3 Select the destination that you want to edit using or and press OK 4 Select the item that you want to edit using or and press OK Type Name Destination Coded Dial 5 When the edit is complete select Apply using or and press OK 6 Select Apply using or and press OK 㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 61: ... the PIN and press OK 3 Select the destination that you want to delete using or and press OK 4 Select Yes using and press OK 3 Press Back to close the menu screen Registering and Editing a Coded Dial Code Using the Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI and log on to the system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 62: ...ep 4 To edit the registered coded dial 1 Click No Type or Name 2 Click Edit 3 Specify the required settings in the edit screen and click OK To delete the registered coded dial Click Delete of the destination which you want to delete 㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 63: ...4 Click the unregistered No Type or Name 5 Select Destination Type to Register and click OK 6 Specify the required settings and click OK 㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 64: ...㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 65: ...stinations must be registered in one touch keys or coded dial codes before they are added to a group Registering and Editing a Destination Group from the Operation Panel 1 Press or 2 Press Address Book To register new group addresses 1 Press 2 Select Register New Destination to Address Book using or and press OK When the address book PIN is selected Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press ...

Page 66: ... OK 6 Select Name using or and press OK 7 Use the numeric keys to specify Name Entering Text 8 Select Apply using or and press OK 9 Select Destinations using or and press OK 10 Select Add using or and press OK 11 Select the destination that you want to add using or and press OK 㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 67: ...stination s to a group 1 Press 2 Select Edit Address Book using or and press OK When the address book PIN is selected Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press OK 3 Select the group to be edited using or and press OK 4 Select Destinations using or and press OK 5 Select Add using or and press OK 㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 68: ...K To delete destination s from a group 1 Press 2 Select Edit Address Book using or and press OK When the address book PIN is selected Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press OK 3 Select the group to be edited using or and press OK 4 Select Destinations using or and press OK 㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 69: ...es using and press OK 8 Select Apply using or and press OK 9 Select Apply using or and press OK To change the name of a group 1 Press 2 Select Edit Address Book using or and press OK When the address book PIN is selected Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press OK 㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 70: ...e Name Entering Text 6 Select Apply using or and press OK 7 Select Apply using or and press OK To delete group s 1 Press 2 Select Delete From Address Book using or and press OK When the address book PIN is selected Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press OK 㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 71: ...s using and press OK 3 Press Back to close the menu screen Registering and Editing a Destination Group Using the Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI and log on to the system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Address Book 㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 72: ...ct from Address Book 4 Click One Touch or Coded Dial from the drop down list and click Display 5 Select the check box of the destination which you want to add to the group and click OK 6 Make sure the destination you registered is displayed in Members List and click OK To delete destination s from the registered group dial 㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 73: ... registered group dial 1 Click No Type or Name 2 Click Edit 3 Change the name of Group Name and click OK To delete the registered group dial Click Delete of the group dial which you want to delete 4 Click the unregistered No Type or Name 5 Select Group in Destination Type to Register and click OK 㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 74: ...Select the destination s to be registered in this group 1 Select One Touch or Coded Dial from the drop down list and click Display 2 Select the check box of the destination which you want to register in the group 3 Click OK 㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 75: ...8 Make sure that the destination you registered is displayed in Members List and click OK 㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 76: ...see the following sections Supplied Toner Cartridge About Replacement Toner Cartridges Handling Toner Cartridges Storing Toner Cartridges Using the Toner Saver Mode Purchasing Consumables Toner Cartridges 㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 77: ...setting 2 ISO IEC 19752 is the global standard related to Method for the determination of toner cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi function devices that contain printer components issued by ISO International Organization for Standardization The average yield of the replacement toner cartridge varies from that of the supplied toner cartridge Supplied Toner Cart...

Page 78: ... sheets 1 The average yield is on the basis of ISO IEC 19752 2 when printing A4 size paper with the default print density setting 2 ISO IEC 19752 is the global standard related to Method for the determination of toner cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi function devices that contain printer components issued by ISO International Organization for Standardization...

Page 79: ... and consult a physician IMPORTANT Handling toner cartridges Keep the toner cartridge away from computer screens disk drives and floppy disks They may be damaged by magnet inside the toner cartridge Avoid locations subject to high temperature high humidity or rapid changes in temperature Do not expose the toner cartridge to direct sunlight or bright light for more than five minutes Store the toner...

Page 80: ...not responsible for any malfunction accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge For more information see http www canon com counterfeit 㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 81: ...t of salt is contained in the air or where there is a lot of dust Keep toner cartridges out of the reach of small children Keep toner cartridges away from products that may be damaged by magnetism such as a floppy disk or disk drive Store toner cartridges in the same orientation as when they are installed in the machine Do not store toner cartridges vertically or upside down When removing the tone...

Page 82: ...uality tab of the printer driver 1 Press Menu 2 Select Adjustment Maintenance using or and press OK 3 Select Toner Saver Mode using or and press OK 4 Select Off or On using or and press OK Off Disable the toner saver mode On Enable the toner saver mode NOTE When the Toner Saver Mode is set to On Using the Toner Saver Mode 㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 83: ... be conserved Note that the output may not be clear as subtle details such as thin lines and light colors may not be clearly reproduced 5 Press Menu to return to the standby mode 㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 84: ...017 To purchase replacement toner cartridges contact your local authorized Canon dealer To find a dealer contact the Canon help line Purchasing Consumables 㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 85: ...ection describes how to place documents on the platen glass or in the feeder Placing Documents on the Platen Glass Placing Documents in the Feeder Placing Documents 㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 86: ...e feeder 2 Place your document face down 3 Align the document with the appropriate paper size marks If the document does not match any of the paper size marks align the center of your document with the arrow mark 4 Close the feeder Placing Documents on the Platen Glass 㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 87: ...The machine is ready to scan or copy the document When scanning or copying is complete remove the document from the platen glass 㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 88: ...ul not to get your fingers caught This may cause personal injury Do not press down the feeder forcefully This may damage the platen glass and cause personal injury Attention Placing Documents on the Platen Glass 㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 89: ...tle wider than the document width 2 Fan the document stack and align the edges of the pages 3 Neatly place the document face up Place the document under the load limit guides A Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit marks B Placing Documents in the Feeder 㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 90: ...ent The machine is ready to copy or scan the document IMPORTANT Adjust the document guides to the paper width without space If the document guides are loose or tight this may result in misfeeds or paper jams 㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 91: ...ment from the document delivery tray to avoid paper jams Avoid scanning the same document more than 30 times When scanned repeatedly the document can become folded or torn which may cause paper jams Adjust the document guides to the paper width without space If the document guides are too loose or too tight this may result in misfeeds or paper jams Attention Placing Documents in the Feeder 㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢...

Page 92: ...ur choice of paper size or type By default the paper size is set to A4 and the type to Plain 60 89 g m To use a different paper size or type you need to change the default settings For the Paper Drawer In the Paper Drawer In the Multi Purpose Tray Loading Paper 㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 93: ...er 2 Slide the paper guides to the size mark for the paper to be loaded While holding the lock release lever A adjust the length of the paper guide If you want to change the size of the paper to be loaded be sure to register the paper size in Setting the Paper Size and Type 3 Fan the document stack and even the ends In the Paper Drawer 㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 94: ...h a letterhead or logo See Paper Loading Orientation and load the paper in the proper orientation 5 Hold down the paper then set it under the hooks A on the paper guides IMPORTANT Adjust the paper guides to the paper width without space If the paper guides are loose or tight this may result in misfeeds or paper jams 㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 95: ... the paper stack goes over the load limit mark lines this may result in misfeeds 7 Insert the paper drawer into the machine If Confirm Paper Settings is set to On a confirmation screen appears when the paper drawer is set in the machine System Settings 8 Specify the loaded paper size and type For the Paper Drawer 㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 96: ...ype from the one loaded in the paper drawer 1 Open and pull out the multi purpose tray When loading long size paper open the auxiliary tray 2 Spread the paper guides a little wider than the actual paper width 3 Gently insert the paper stack into the multi purpose tray with the print side face up In the Multi Purpose Tray 㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 97: ...n in the figure 3 Gently insert the envelope into the multi purpose tray with the print side face up 4 Adjust the paper guides to the paper width without space IMPORTANT Adjust the paper guides to the paper width without space If the paper guides are too loose or too tight this may result in misfeeds or paper jams 㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 98: ...5 Be sure that the paper stack is loaded under the load limit guides A 6 Specify the loaded paper size and type Setting the Paper Size and Type 㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 99: ... then align the edges of the stack properly on a hard flat surface Do not exceed the load limit mark when loading paper Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit marks If the paper stack exceeds the loading limit marks this may result in misfeeds When printing on envelopes Load envelopes with the front side non glued side facing up You cannot print on the reverse side of env...

Page 100: ... 160 sheets Approx 320 sheets Heavy paper 129 to 163 g m Approx 25 sheets Recycled paper 60 to 89 g m Approx 50 sheets Approx 250 sheets Approx 500 sheets Color paper 60 to 89 g m Approx 50 sheets Approx 250 sheets Approx 500 sheets Transparency Approx 15 sheets Label Approx 20 sheets Index Card Approx 15 sheets Envelope Approx 5 sheets Paper Loading Capacity 㻝㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrint...

Page 101: ...ith the printing side facing down with the printing side facing down 1 sided printing 2 with the printing side facing up with the printing side facing up Automatic 2 sided printing with the front side facing up with the front side facing up 1 When Switch Paper Feed Method is set to Print Speed Priority the default setting Selecting the Print Side 2 When Switch Paper Feed Method is set to Print Sid...

Page 102: ...et to Print Speed Priority the default setting Selecting the Print Side 2 When Switch Paper Feed Method is set to Print Side Priority Selecting the Print Side When printing on envelopes Load envelopes with the front side non glued side facing up to the Multi purpose tray as shown below Feeding direction Envelope No 10 DL ISO C5 Load the envelopes so that the flap is toward the left of the machine ...

Page 103: ...Envelope ISO B5 Load the envelopes so that the flap is toward the back of the machine when it is viewed from the front 㻝㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 104: ...nd type settings IMPORTANT If the setting is different from the size of the loaded paper An error message appears or printing is not performed correctly For the Paper Drawer Registering the Default Paper Settings for the Multi purpose Tray Setting a Custom Paper Size Setting the Paper Size and Type 㻝㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 105: ... 1 or Drawer 2 using or and press OK Drawer 2 is displayed only when the optional paper drawer Drawer 2 is installed 4 Select a paper size using or and press OK Supported Paper Types 5 Select the paper type using or and press OK For the Paper Drawer 㻝㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 106: ...6 Press Select Paper Settings to close the Select Paper screen 㻝㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 107: ... setting screen is not displayed when paper is loaded 1 Press Select Paper Settings 2 Select Paper Settings using or and press OK 3 Select Multi Purpose Tray using or and press OK 4 Select On using or and press OK 5 Select Paper Settings using or and press OK Registering the Default Paper Settings for the Multi purpose Tray 㻝㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 108: ... paper is listed at the top Select it with If you select Custom Size Specifies the size of X direction and Y direction of the custom paper Specify the paper size in portrait orientation Y X and within the range that can be defined 1 Select the direction using or and press OK 2 Specify the size using or and press OK You can also enter values using the numeric keys 㻝㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsP...

Page 109: ... 3 Select Apply using or and press OK 9 Select the paper type using or and press OK 10 Press Select Paper Settings to close the Select Paper screen 㻝㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 110: ...n Paper Size Setting Screen Registering the Default Paper Settings for the Multi purpose Tray 1 Press Select Paper Settings 2 Select Paper Settings using or and press OK 3 Select Register Custom Paper using or and press OK 4 Select Not Registered using or and press OK When selecting the registered custom paper you can edit and delete the custom paper Setting a Custom Paper Size 㻝㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloade...

Page 111: ...fined 1 Select the direction using or and press OK 2 Specify the size using or and press OK You can also enter values using the numeric keys 3 Select Apply using or and press OK 6 Select the paper type using or and press OK 7 Press Select Paper Settings to close the Select Paper screen 㻝㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 112: ...he sound volume during a fax transmission Select On sound enabled or Off sound disabled using or and press OK Proceed to Step 5 Ring Tone Adjusts the ring volume when receiving a fax Press or to select On to activate the ring or Off to deactivating the sound and then press OK Proceed to Step 5 TX Done Tone Adjust the fax sound volume when sending is complete Select On sound enabled or Off sound di...

Page 113: ... Tone Specify whether or not the machine makes a sound when an invalid key is pressed Restock Supplies Tone Specify whether or not the machine makes a sound when a toner cartridge is almost empty Warning Tone Specify whether or not the machine makes a sound when unexpected events occur such as paper jams or improper operations Job Done Tone Specify whether or not the machine makes a sound when a j...

Page 114: ...ings Setting the Current Date and Time Setting the Sleep Timer Setting the Auto Reset Timer Specifying the Screen that Is Displayed after Auto Reset Is Performed Setting the Auto Offline Time Customizing Timer Settings 㻝㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 115: ...t the setting using or and press OK Settings Purpose What to do Date Display Type Specify the date display format Select one of the following display formats using or and press OK The formats include the following MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD 12 24 Hour Clock Specify the time display Select one of the following display formats using or and press OK The formats include the following Setting the...

Page 116: ...nd press OK 2 Specify the starting date of the daylight saving time Select Month using or and press OK Select the starting month and press OK Select Day using or and press OK Select the starting week and press OK Select the starting day and press OK Select Apply using or and press OK 3 Repeat Step 2 to specify the ending date Make sure to configure Time Zone Settings before configuring this settin...

Page 117: ... Sleep Timer using or and press OK 4 Press or to specify the time for the Auto Reset timer to activate and then press OK You can also enter values using the numeric keys We recommend that you use the default timer setting NOTE To set the auto sleep timer You can set the auto sleep timer between 3 and 60 minutes in one minute interval The default is 5 minutes Setting the Sleep Timer 㻝㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downl...

Page 118: ...5 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻝㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 119: ...n the screen and the Error indicator is blinking except when Output Tray Full is displayed or when No Paper is displayed when there are no jobs the machine is in the middle of adjustment or cleaning a paper jam occurs the handset or the handset of the external telephone has been off the hook The machine returns from sleep mode when Energy Saver is pressed the handset or the external telephone is t...

Page 120: ... screen is displayed a job is currently processing a message appears on the display and the Error indicator is blinking except for cases in which the job can be continued even when error message appears 1 Press Menu 2 Select Timer Settings using or and press OK 3 Select Auto Reset Timer using or and press OK 4 Specify the time using or and press OK The machine does not return to the default screen...

Page 121: ...5 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻝㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 122: ...o Reset using or and press OK 4 Select Default Screen or Selected Screen using or and press OK Default Screen The screen selected in Setting the Default Screen is displayed Selected Screen The screen displayed prior to auto reset is displayed again 5 Press Menu to close the menu screen Specifying the Screen that Is Displayed after Auto Reset Is Performed 㻝㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter co...

Page 123: ...a specified length of time 1 Press Menu 2 Select Timer Settings using or and press OK 3 Select Auto Offline Time using or and press OK 4 Specify the time using or and press OK The machine does not return to offline mode automatically if you set the timer to 0 You can also enter values using the numeric keys Setting the Auto Offline Time 㻝㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 124: ...5 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻝㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 125: ...ching the Display Language Operation Panel or Remote UI Adjusting the Display Brightness Contrast and Invert Screen Colors Changing Units of Measurement Changing Message Display Time Changing Scroll Speed Changing Cursor Movement Customizing Display Settings 㻝㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 126: ...ority than the default screen specified here Default Screen the screen specified here is displayed Selected Screen the screen that the machine returns to after auto reset Specifying the Screen that Is Displayed after Auto Reset Is Performed 1 Press Menu 2 Select Preferences using or and press OK 3 Select Display Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Select Default Screen using or and press OK 5 ...

Page 127: ...y Display the copy mode screen Fax Display the fax mode screen Scan Display the scan mode screen USB Direct Print Display the USB direct print mode screen 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻝㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 128: ... and press OK 4 Select Language or Remote UI Language using or and press OK Language Specify the display language used for the operation panel and reports Remote UI Language Specify the display language used for the Remote UI 5 Select the language using or and press OK Switching the Display Language Operation Panel or Remote UI 㻝㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 129: ...6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻝㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 130: ...r and press OK 3 Select Display Settings using or and press OK 4 Select the settings you want to change using or and press OK 5 Adjust the display For Brightness Adjust the brightness using or and press OK Adjusting the Display Brightness Contrast and Invert Screen Colors 㻝㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 131: ...ss OK Decrease the contrast Increase the contrast For Invert Screen Colors Select Off or On using or and press OK Off Use the default display colors On Invert the display colors 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻝㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 132: ...enu 2 Select Preferences using or and press OK 3 Select Display Settings using or and press OK 4 Select mm Inch Entry Switch using or and press OK 5 Select mm or Inch using or and press OK Changing Units of Measurement 㻝㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 133: ... mm Display length in millimeters Inch Display length in inches 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻝㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 134: ...nstructions provided in this section 1 Press Menu 2 Select Preferences using or and press OK 3 Select Display Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Message Display Time using or and press OK 5 Select the display time using or and press OK You can also enter values using the numeric keys Changing Message Display Time 㻝㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 135: ...6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻝㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 136: ...ed on the screen 1 Press Menu 2 Select Preferences using or and press OK 3 Select Display Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Scrolling Speed using or and press OK 5 Select the speed using or and press OK Changing Scroll Speed 㻝㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 137: ...6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻝㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 138: ...en entering text 1 Press Menu 2 Select Preferences using or and press OK 3 Select Display Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Cursor Movement using or and press OK 5 Select Auto or Manual using or and press OK Changing Cursor Movement 㻝㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 139: ...proximately one second after a character has been entered Manual The cursor does not move automatically To enter the next character press to move the cursor forward 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻝㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 140: ... 2 Select Common Settings using or and press OK 3 Select Drawer Auto Selection using or and press OK 4 Select the function to specify using or and press OK 5 Select the paper source using or and press OK Drawer 2 is displayed only when the optional paper drawer Drawer 2 is installed If you select Printer in Step 4 Multi Purpose Tray is not displayed The multi purpose tray is fixed for auto selecti...

Page 141: ...tiple drawers other than Multi Purpose Tray cannot be set to Off at the same time On Recognizes the paper drawer as auto selection 7 Select Apply using or and press OK When Apply is grayed out Specify the settings of Drawer 1 or Drawer 2 to On 8 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻝㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 142: ...he odd pages are printed on the first side for 2 sided printing as shown below Make sure to place the stack correctly to use preprinted paper as the side to be placed face up varies between 1 sided and 2 sided printing Select this setting when using paper types other than preprinted paper using preprinted paper only for 1 sided printing When Print Side Priority is selected All pages are printed on...

Page 143: ... as shown below when Print Speed Priority is selected Feeding direction For details on the procedure for loading paper when using multi purpose tray or when printing pages of the landscape layout see Paper Loading Orientation For 1 sided printing For 2 sided printing Place the stack with the printed side face down Place the stack with the front side first page face up 㻝㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Man...

Page 144: ... or when printing pages of the landscape layout see Paper Loading Orientation The side to be placed face up is the same between 1 sided and 2 sided printing Place the stack with the printed side face up for 1 sided printing Place the stack with the front side first page face up for 2 sided printing 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻝㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 145: ...t settings Initializing the Menu Initializing the Network Settings Initializing the Key and Certificate Initializing the Address Book Initializing the System Management Settings Initializing the Settings 㻝㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 146: ...Copy Settings Fax Settings Scan Settings USB Direct Print Settings Printer Settings Initialize All 1 Press Menu 2 Select Initialize Menu using or and press OK 3 Select the item using or and press OK 4 Select Yes using and press OK Initializing is performed Initializing the Menu 㻝㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 147: ...5 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻝㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 148: ...K When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Press or to highlight Initialize Network Settings and then press OK 4 Press to highlight Yes and then press OK Initializing is performed 5 Initializing the Network Settings 㻝㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 149: ...Press Menu to close the Menu screen 㻝㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 150: ...EEE802 1X TLS certificate and SSL setting are set to Off 1 Press Menu 2 Select System Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Initialize Key and Certificate using and and press OK 4 Select Yes using and press OK Initializing is performed Initializing the Key and...

Page 151: ...5 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻝㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 152: ...When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Initialize Address Book using or and press OK 4 Select Yes using and press OK Initializing is performed Initializing the Address Book 㻝㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 153: ...5 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻝㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 154: ... History USB Device On Off Memory Media Storage On Off USB Direct Print On Off Product Extended Survey Program On Off Cloud Print Settings Confirm Paper Settings Secure Print Settings Select PDL Plug n Play All settings mentioned above 1 Press Menu 2 Select System Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and...

Page 155: ...4 Select the item using or and press OK 5 Select Yes using and press OK Initializing is performed 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻝㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 156: ...whether to print this report automatically after every 40 transmissions Sending and receiving reports can be printed in separate formats Communication Management Fax TX Result Report Specify whether to print this report automatically or only when an error occurs Fax Send Results Report E Mail Windows SMB TX Result Report Specify whether to print this report automatically or only when an error occu...

Page 157: ...rint the following reports automatically Fax Send Results Report E Mail Windows SMB Send Results Report Communication Management Receive Results Printing the Report Automatically 㻝㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 158: ...sult OK Transmission finished successfully NG Transmission failed When an error code is displayed see the following Error Codes 1 Press Report 2 Select Report Settings using or and press OK 3 Select Fax TX Result Report using or and press OK 4 Specify how you want the report printed Fax Send Results Report 㻝㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 159: ...nformation of the document that you are sending in the report and press OK 3 Proceed to Step 5 To print the report only when a send error occurs 1 Press or to select Only When Error Occurs and press OK 2 Press or to select whether to include the information of the document that you are sending in the report and press OK 3 Proceed to Step 5 5 Press Report to close Report Settings screen 㻝㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 D...

Page 160: ...llowing Error Codes 1 Press Report 2 Select Report Settings using or and press OK 3 Select E Mail Windows SMB TX Result Report using or and press OK 4 Specify how you want the report printed To choose not to print the report automatically 1 Press or to select Off and press OK 2 Proceed to Step 5 E Mail Windows SMB Send Results Report 㻝㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 161: ...e report and press OK 3 Proceed to Step 5 To print the report only when a send error occurs 1 Press or to select Only When Error Occurs and press OK 2 Press or to select whether to include the information of the document that you are sending in the report and press OK 3 Proceed to Step 5 5 Press Report to close Report Settings screen 㻝㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 162: ...tart time Name No Mode Page Result OK Transmission finished successfully NG Transmission failed When an error code is displayed see the following Error Codes 1 Press Report 2 Select Report Settings using or and press OK 3 Select Communication Management Report using or and press OK 4 Specify how you want the report printed Communication Management 㻝㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manua...

Page 163: ... and press OK 2 Select On using or and press OK 3 Proceed to Step 5 To print sending and receiving reports separately 1 Select Separate TX RX using or and press OK 2 Select Off or On using or and press OK Off Print sending and receiving reports in the same format On Print sending and receiving reports in different formats 3 Proceed to Step 5 5 Press Report to close Report Settings screen 㻝㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠...

Page 164: ...eets Result OK Transmission finished successfully NG Transmission failed When an error code is displayed see the following Error Codes 1 Press Report 2 Select Report Settings using or and press OK 3 Select RX Result Report using or and press OK 4 Specify how you want the report printed Receive Results 㻝㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 165: ...port every time you receive a document 1 Select On using or and press OK 2 Proceed to Step 5 To print the report only when a receive error occurs 1 Select Only When Error Occurs using or and press OK 2 Proceed to Step 5 5 Press Report to close Report Settings screen 㻝㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 166: ...rinting the Address Book List Printing the User Data List Printing System Manager Data List Printing a Communication Management Report Printing Dept ID Management Report Printing the PCL PS Font List Printing List 㻝㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 167: ...e touch number Address Name Destination Type Group No one touch numbers or coded numbers registered as a group Group name Address Name 1 Press Report 2 Select Print Reports using or and press OK 3 Select Address Book List using or and press OK 4 Select the item to print using or and press OK Printing the Address Book List 㻝㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 168: ... is loaded in the paper source and press OK Load the displayed paper size 6 Select Yes using and press OK Printing starts 7 Press Report to close Address Book List screen 㻝㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 169: ...Direct Print Settings Printer Settings Adjustment Maintenance Reports Paper Settings 1 Press Report 2 Select Print Reports using or and press OK 3 Select User Data List using or and press OK 4 Make sure that paper is loaded in the paper source and press OK Load the displayed paper size Printing the User Data List 㻝㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 170: ...5 Select Yes using and press OK Printing starts 6 Press Report to close Print Report screen 㻝㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 171: ... Settings Reports Paper Settings If an error code is displayed see the following Error Codes 1 Press Report 2 Select Print Reports using or and press OK 3 Select System Manager Data List using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out Printing System Manager Data List 㻝㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloade...

Page 172: ...is loaded and then press OK Load paper of the type displayed on the screen 5 Select Yes using and press OK Printing begins 6 Press Report to close the Print Reports screen 㻝㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 173: ...nished successfully NG Transmission failed When an error code is displayed see the following Error Codes 1 Press Report 2 Select Print Reports using or and press OK 3 Select Communication Management Report using or and press OK 4 Make sure that paper is loaded in the paper source and press OK Load the displayed paper size Printing a Communication Management Report 㻝㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Manuals...

Page 174: ...5 Select Yes using and press OK Printing starts 6 Press Report to close the Print Reports screen 㻝㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 175: ...s using or and press OK 3 Select Dept ID Management Report using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 4 Make sure that paper is loaded and then press OK Load paper of the type displayed on the screen Printing Dept ID Management Report 㻝㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Man...

Page 176: ...5 Select Yes and press OK Printing begins 6 Press Report to close the Print Reports screen 㻝㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 177: ...er size for Paper Settings for the selected paper source Registering the Default Paper Settings for the Multi purpose Tray For the Paper Drawer The font list cannot be printed unless the paper size specified for Paper Settings for the selected paper source matches the paper size loaded in the paper source 1 Press Report 2 Select Print Reports using or and press OK 3 Select PCL Font List or PS Font...

Page 178: ...5 Select Yes using and press OK Printing starts 6 Press Report to close Print Report screen 㻝㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 179: ...eceived fax jobs 1 Press Status Monitor Cancel 2 Select Device Status using or and press OK 3 Select Check Counter using or and press OK The counter is displayed 4 Press Status Monitor Cancel to close Check Counter screen Viewing the Counter 㻝㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 180: ...artment ID Management If the login display of the department ID appears Enter the department ID and PIN to operate the machine 1 Select Dept ID using or and press OK 2 Use numeric keys to enter the department ID and then press OK 3 Select PIN using or and press OK 4 Use numeric keys to enter the PIN and press OK Necessary Operations in Department ID Management 㻝㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrin...

Page 181: ...5 Press Log In Out The operation which is performed after using the machine Press Log In Out to open the login display of the department ID 㻝㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 182: ... serial number a character string of three letters and a 5 digit number is written on the rating label on the rear side of the machine Locating the Serial Number 㻝㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 183: ...0FR4 03J Note that specifications are subject to change without notice Specifications 㻝㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 184: ...ent and conditions under which the machine is being used Warm up Time 11 seconds or less Temperature 20 C humidity 65 RH from when the machine is turned ON using the main power switch to when the standby screen is displayed Warm up time may vary depending on the conditions of the installation environment Weight Main unit the toner cartridge included Approx 19 1 kg Environmental Conditions Temperat...

Page 185: ... MHz Data Transmission Rate IEEE802 11g 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps IEEE802 11b 1 2 5 5 11 Mbps Communication Mode Infrastructure Mode Security WEP WPA PSK TKIP AES CCMP WPA2 PSK TKIP AES CCMP Setting Methods WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup Manually Setting Wireless LAN Specification MF6180dw Only 㻝㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 186: ...ies First Copy Time A4 8 seconds or less The copy speed on A4 size plain paper on one side printing is measured during continuous copying Copy speeds vary depending on the paper type and size as well as the paper feeding direction Copy speeds on smaller paper sizes may be slower Plus the machine may experience downtime or decrease the copy speed in the middle of a continuous copy run to adjust the...

Page 187: ...dation 256 gradations Toner Cartridges Toner Cartridges 1 The actual paper capacity varies depending on the installation environment and paper type used 2 The print speed on A4 size plain paper on one side printing is measured during continuous printing Print speeds vary depending on the paper type and size as well as the paper feeding direction Print speeds on smaller paper sizes may be slower Pl...

Page 188: ...oftware interpolation resolution 9600 dpi x 9600 dpi Scan Speed A4 300 x 300 dpi Color 9 sheets minute Black and White 28 sheets minute Host Interface 100 Base TX 10 Base T Hi Speed USB USB Operating System Windows XP Vista 7 8 Mac OS 10 5 8 or later Driver TWAIN WIA 1 0 Windows XP WIA 2 0 Windows Vista 7 8 ICA Mac OS X 10 6 x Scan speeds were only measured Scanner Specifications 㻝㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloa...

Page 189: ...fine 200 dpi x 400 dpi Ultrafine 400 dpi x 400 dpi Dialing One touch keys 19 destinations Coded dialing 181 destinations Group dialing 199 destinations Address book dialing Regular dialing with numeric keys Automatic redialing Manual redialing Sequential broadcast 210 destinations Receiving Automatic reception Remote reception by telephone Default ID 25 Reports Fax Send Results Report E Mail Windo...

Page 190: ...ephone Specifications Telephone Type Handset optional External telephone External telephone with the built in answer function Data modem Telephone Specifications 㻝㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 191: ...6 or later with Samba 2 2 or later Mac OS X Mac OS X 10 7 is not supported Red Hat Linux 7 2 or later with Samba 2 2 or later Interface 100BASE TX 10BASE T Color Mode Color Black White Inputted Image Text Text Photo Photo Paper Size A4 B5 A5 Specification for E mail Sending Communication Protocol SMTP Data Format PDF Compact PDF JPEG TIFF Resolution Resolutions for data formats are JPEG TIFF PDF P...

Page 192: ...er Mac OS X Mac OS X 10 7 is not supported Red Hat Linux 7 2 or later with Samba 2 2 or later Interface 100BASE TX 10BASE T Color Mode Color Black White Inputted Image Text Text Photo Photo Paper Size A4 B5 A5 POP3 is available to use only when authenticating before sending 㻝㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 193: ...er Capacity 500 sheets 60 to 89 g m Available Paper Supported Paper Types Power Supply From main unit Dimensions W x L x H 390 mm x 473 mm x 136 mm Weight Approx 4 1 kg Optional Drawer 㻝㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 194: ...0FR4 041 Supported Document Types Scan Area Document Type 㻝㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 195: ... A4 2 1 To copy transparent documents for example tracing paper or transparencies make sure to place the documents face down on the platen glass and cover them with plain white paper 2 80 g m IMPORTANT To place your document Make sure any glue ink or correction fluid on the document is completely dry before placing it on the platen glass or into the feeder To prevent paper jams in the feeder Do no...

Page 196: ... Refer to the following document loading orientation Platen glass With the document facing down Feeder With the document loaded in the document feeder tray Copy Platen Glass Feeder See Printable Area if you would like to know the practical printable area Fax Platen Glass Feeder Scan Platen Glass Feeder The whole document can be scanned without any margins Scan Area 㻝㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Manual...

Page 197: ...0FR4 044 Supported Paper Types Printable Area Paper 㻝㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 198: ...82 mm x 257 mm A5 148 mm x 210 mm Legal 215 9 mm x 355 6 mm 2 Letter 215 9 mm x 279 4 mm 2 3 4 Statement 139 7 mm x 215 9 mm Executive 184 mm x 266 7 mm Officio 215 9 mm x 317 5 mm B officio 216 mm x 355 mm M officio 215 9 mm x 341 mm Government Letter 203 2 mm x 266 7 mm Government Legal 203 2 mm x 330 2 mm Foolscap 215 9 mm x 330 2 mm A foolscap 205 7 mm x 337 8 mm Envelope COM10 104 7 mm x 241 ...

Page 199: ...per Size and Type Using chlorine free paper Chlorine free paper can be used with this machine Type The following paper types are supported Unavailable Paper Type Printer Driver Setting Paper Source Paper Capacity Paper Drawer 1 Paper Drawer 2 optional Multi purpose Tray Plain paper 1 2 60 to 89 g m Plain Paper Plain Paper L 4 250 sheets 500 sheets 50 sheets Heavy paper 3 90 to 128 g m Heavy Paper ...

Page 200: ...e until ready to use Make sure to keep it on a flat surface Store paper stacks in a place where temperatures are somewhere between 18 to 24 C and humidity is somewhere between 40 to 60 RH Avoid rubbing the printed paper with fingers or cloth because it may cause toner stain or toner peeling CAUTION To print on damp paper The following problems may occur Steam is emitted from the machine s output a...

Page 201: ...eft NOTE To enlarge the printable area Apply the following setting from the printer driver 1 Click Advanced Setting in the Finishing tab of printer driver 2 Set Enlarge Print Area to ON Depending on the job the data may not be printed in a part of document edge or the bottom edge of paper or the following paper may be tainted This setting is valid only when the job is printed from the printer driv...

Page 202: ...ling copy jobs Checking copy job history See Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs Checking Copy Job History Using various copy functions See the following sections Selecting Copy Papers Adjusting the Density Selecting the Document Type 2 Sided Copying Enlarging Reducing Copies Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet N on 1 Copying by Saving Paper Collating Copies Erasing Dark Borders and Frame Lines...

Page 203: ...n appears 3 Specify the copy settings as needed Selecting Copy Papers Adjusting the Density Selecting the Document Type 2 Sided Copying Enlarging Reducing Copies Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet N on 1 Collating Copies Erasing Dark Borders and Frame Lines Frame Erase Basic Copy Operations 㻞㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 204: ...ngs Mode Memory 4 Enter the copy quantity 1 to 99 using numeric keys Press Clear to cancel the entered quantity 5 Press Start Copying starts When Incorrect Size Setting appears Change the Paper Settings menu or load the paper size specified in the Paper Settings menu When Incorrect Size Setting Appears When the message Memory is full Scanning canceled Print appears Print the pages successfully sca...

Page 205: ...nts in a reduction ratio different from its default value for 4 on 1 2 on 1 secify the Copy Ratio later Copy Ratio is fixed at 100 for ID Card Copy The frame width specified at Erase Frame increases decreases according to the Copy Ratio setting Paper Depending on its document size selected paper source 2 sided copy is not available 4 on 1 2 on 1 If you want to copy a document in a copy ratio diffe...

Page 206: ...n copying copy process In addition you can check the copy job history Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs Checking Copy Job History Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs Checking Copy Job History 㻞㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 207: ...ce to cancel the job when the machine holds one job only 2 Select the job that you want to cancel when more than one job is processing using or and press OK 3 Select Yes using or when Cancel appears and press OK Or press Stop to cancel the job The job is canceled Select Details using or to check the details of the job that you want to cancel and press OK Checking and canceling a copy job using Sta...

Page 208: ...layed To cancel the job 1 Select Cancel using or and press OK 2 Select Yes using and press OK The job is canceled 3 Press Status Monitor Cancel to close the screen To only check the details of the selected job Press Status Monitor Cancel after you have checked the details of the selected job to close the screen 㻞㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 209: ...g or and press OK 3 Select Copy Job History using or and press OK 4 Select a job that you want to check using or and press OK 5 Select an item that you want to check using or and press OK 6 Checking Copy Job History 㻞㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 210: ...Check the details 7 Press Status Monitor Cancel to close the screen 㻞㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 211: ...and type to be loaded beforehand Setting the Paper Size and Type 1 Place your document Placing Documents Supported Document Types 2 Press 3 Press Select Paper Settings You can display the setting screen also by selecting Paper in the copy mode screen 4 Select the paper drawer using or and press OK 5 Press Start Selecting Copy Papers 㻞㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 212: ...R4 04H You can adjust the density or the background to the most appropriate level for the document Density Adjustment Background Adjusting the Density 㻞㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 213: ...most appropriate level 1 Place your document Placing Documents Supported Document Types 2 Press 3 Select Density using or and press OK 4 Adjust the density using or and press OK Decrease the density Increase the density 5 Press Start Density Adjustment 㻞㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 214: ...ts 1 Place your document Placing Documents Supported Document Types 2 Press 3 Select Density using or and press OK 4 Select Background using or and press OK 5 Adjust how much background color to be removed Automatic adjustment 1 Select Auto using or and press OK Background 㻞㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 215: ...lect Adjustment using or and press OK 2 Adjust background color with or and press OK Makes the background density lighter Makes the background density darker 6 Press Start 㻞㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 216: ...riate document type using or and press OK Text Best suited for text only documents Text Photo Suited for documents that contain text and photos Text Photo Quality Suited for documents that contain text and photos You can set its priority text or photos Photo Suited for documents that contain magazine photos When selecting Text Photo Quality Next perform the following procedure 1 Adjust priority us...

Page 217: ... Prioritize character readability Prioritize illustration readability such as photos 5 Press Start 㻞㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 218: ...0FR4 04R Copying 1 Sided Document to 2 Sides Copying 2 Sided Document to 2 Sides Copying 2 Sided Document to 1 Side 2 Sided Copying 㻞㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 219: ...ng can be performed manually using a printed document Place a printed document in the multi purpose tray to copy on the back side To copy on the back side of a printed document smooth out the curling edges of the sheets and place them one by one in the multi purpose tray This feature is supported only for sheets printed from this machine You cannot make a copy on the printed side 1 According to th...

Page 220: ...tting screen also by selecting 2 Sided in the copy mode screen 5 Select 1 2 Sided using or and press OK To specify the 2 Sided copy format 1 Select Format Settings using or and press OK 2 Select 1 2 Sided using or and press OK 3 Select the orientation of the original using or and press OK 㻞㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 221: ...s OK 6 Press Start To copy a document by placing on the platen glass 1 Place the next page and press Start Repeat this step until all pages are scanned 2 Select Start Copying using or and press OK 㻞㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 222: ...performed manually using a printed document Place a printed document in the multi purpose tray to copy on the back side To copy on the back side of a printed document smooth out the curling edges of the sheets and place them one by one in the multi purpose tray This feature is supported only for sheets printed from this machine You cannot make a copy on the printed side 1 According to the paper si...

Page 223: ...pes 3 Press 4 Press 2 Sided You can display the setting screen also by selecting 2 Sided in the copy mode screen 5 Select 2 2 Sided with or and press OK If you want to specify how to open original or copy 1 Select Format Settings with or and press OK 㻞㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 224: ...ct the orientation of the original document with or and press OK 4 Select how to open the original document with or and press OK 5 Select how to open the output with or and press OK 6 Press Start 㻞㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 225: ...cument Types 2 Press 3 Press 2 Sided You can display the setting screen also by selecting 2 Sided in the copy mode screen 4 Select 2 1 Sided with or and press OK If you want to set how to open 2 sided original document 1 Select Format Settings with or and press OK 2 Select 2 1 Sided with or and press OK Copying 2 Sided Document to 1 Side 㻞㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 226: ... 3 Select the orientation of the original document with or and press OK 4 Select how to open the original document with or and press OK 5 Press Start 㻞㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 227: ... Place your document Placing Documents Supported Document Types 2 Press 3 Select Copy Ratio using or and press OK 4 Specify the copy ratio To select a preset copy ratio Select the copy ratio using or and press OK To set a copy ratio in 1 increments 1 Select Custom Ratio using or and press OK 2 Specify the ratio using or and press OK You can also enter the copy ratio using the numeric keys Enlargin...

Page 228: ...5 Load the appropriate paper size in the paper source and register the paper size Loading Paper Setting the Paper Size and Type 6 Press Start 㻞㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 229: ...0FR4 04Y 2 on 1 4 on 1 Copying an ID Card Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet N on 1 㻞㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 230: ...y two pages onto one sheet 4 on 1 Copy four pages onto one sheet Select Select Layout to change the copy layout 1 Place your document Placing Documents Supported Document Types 2 Press 3 Select N on 1 using or and press OK 4 Select 2 on 1 or 4 on 1 using or and press OK 2 on 1 4 on 1 㻞㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 231: ...t using or and press OK NOTE About margins on the document To copy in the N on 1 mode margins are created on the output 5 Select the size of the document using or and press OK 6 Select a output size using or and press OK 7 Press Start 㻞㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 232: ... is placed on the platen glass 1 Set the next document and press Start Repeat these steps until all documents are scanned 2 Select Start Copying using or and press OK 㻞㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 233: ...platen glass and then close the feeder Place the card with spacing of 5 mm from the left edge of the platen glass Align the center of the card with the arrow mark as shown below To place the card horizontally To place the card vertically 2 Press 3 Select N on 1 using or and press OK 4 Copying an ID Card 㻞㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 234: ...an is complete 6 Turn sides Place the card with spacing of 5 mm from the left edge of the platen glass Align the center of the card with the arrow mark as shown below To place the card horizontally To place the card vertically 7 Press Start 㻞㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 235: ...he platen glass Place the card on the left half of the platen glass Copy ratio The copy ratio is automatically set to 100 Supported paper sizes Sizes larger than A4 Letter Attention ID Card Copy 㻞㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 236: ...ns on 2 Sided Copying Do not touch your document when making 2 sided copying until the process is complete After copying on the front side is complete the document is partially output reserved and fed into the machine again for copying on the back side Be sure to close the sub output tray before making 2 sided copying 1 Set the paper switch lever correctly to fit the size of paper used for 2 sided...

Page 237: ...rted Document Types 3 Press Paper Save Copy 4 Select the combination that you want to use using or and press OK 5 Select the document size using or and press OK 6 Press Start When the document is placed on the platen glass 㻞㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 238: ... 1 Place the next page and press Start Repeat this step until all pages are scanned 2 Select Start Copying using or and press OK 㻞㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 239: ...three page document printouts of a complete job are grouped and arranged in this page order 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 On Printouts of a complete job are collated For example if you are copying three copies of a three page document printouts of a complete job are grouped and arranged in this page order 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 Place your document Placing Documents Supported Document Types 2 Press 3 Select Colla...

Page 240: ...l the entered quantity 6 Press Start When your document is placed on the platen glass 1 Set the next document and press Start Repeat these steps until all documents are scanned 2 Select Start Copying using or and press OK 㻞㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 241: ...h of margin white background around the copy paper 1 Place your document Placing Documents Supported Document Types 2 Press 3 Select Erase Frame using or and press OK 4 Select On using or and press OK 5 Select the frame width to be erased 1 to 50 mm using or and press OK You can also enter the frame width to be erased using the numeric keys Erasing Dark Borders and Frame Lines Frame Erase 㻞㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢...

Page 242: ...6 Select the size of the original document using or and press OK 7 Press Start 㻞㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 243: ...Adjust the sharpness using or and press OK To clearly capture halftone photos adjust this setting to the appropriate level on the scale This can counteract the effect of moiré patterns uneven gradation and striped patterns To clearly capture text or lines adjust this setting to the appropriate level on the scale It is best suited for copying blueprints and very weak pencil manuscripts Emphasizing ...

Page 244: ...5 Press Start 㻞㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 245: ...ucts are registered in a Mode Memory the memory becomes unavailable if that optional product is removed but its settings remain saved When an optional drawer usage is registered in a Mode Memory the paper feeding setting is changed to Drawer 1 if that optional drawer is removed Registering Mode Memory Deleting Mode Memory Calling and Copying Mode Memory Registering and Using Combination of Copy Se...

Page 246: ...emory using or and press OK 3 Select Register Delete using or and press OK 4 Select the place to register using or and press OK Select any registered place then you can edit settings 5 Select items to specify using or and press OK Registering Mode Memory 㻞㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 247: ...ing Multiple Documents onto One Sheet N on 1 Collating Copies Erasing Dark Borders and Frame Lines Frame Erase Emphasizing the Outline of the Image Sharpness 6 Select Apply using or after you have specified the setting and press OK 7 Select Yes using and press OK Follow the same steps for overwriting settings as well 㻞㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 248: ... using or and press OK 3 Select Register Delete using or and press OK 4 Select a Mode Memory to delete using or and press OK 5 Select Delete using or and press OK 6 Deleting Mode Memory 㻞㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 249: ...Select Yes using and press OK 㻞㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 250: ...d copy the settings as you like 1 Place your document Placing Documents Supported Document Types 2 Press 3 Select Mode Memory using or and press OK 4 Select a Mode Memory to call using or and press OK From Mode 1 to Mode 4 you cannot select any Mode Memory which is not registered 5 Press Start Calling and Copying Mode Memory 㻞㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 251: ...erformed You can change the default values to suit your needs You can change the following default settings based on your needs No of Copies Density Original Type 2 Sided Copy Ratio Paper N on 1 Collate Erase Frame Sharpness 1 Press Menu 2 Select Copy Settings using or and press OK 3 Select Change Defaults using or and press OK 4 Select the item using or and press OK Changing the Default Settings ...

Page 252: ...ecting Copy Papers Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet N on 1 Collating Copies Erasing Dark Borders and Frame Lines Frame Erase Emphasizing the Outline of the Image Sharpness 5 Select Apply using or after you have specified the setting and press OK 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻞㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 253: ...you have not changed the default settings the message No settings have been changed is displayed 2 Check your settings NOTE You can change those settings Select items and press OK to display a setting screen for those items where you can change those settings 3 Press Back to return to the standby display Viewing Copy Settings 㻞㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 254: ... codes in advance you do not have to enter the destination each time you send a fax You can also send faxes directly from your computer to maximize workflow efficiency To send faxes from the machine or to change fax settings See Using the Fax Functions To send faxes directly from a computer See Using PC Fax Fax 㻞㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 255: ...Recipient of an Incoming Fax by Telephone Manual Sending Push button Telephone for Tone Dialing Sending a Fax Abroad Adding Pauses Sending to Multiple Destinations at a Time Sequential Broadcast To change the default values for fax See Changing the Default Fax Settings To change the settings for sending faxes See Changing Fax Settings Settings that Can Be Specified Using the Menu Button Receiving ...

Page 256: ...d Step 3 Specify the receive mode See the Getting Started Step 4 Connect the telephone cable See the Getting Started Step 5 Select the telephone line Select Line Type Specify the initial settings described in Step 1 when you turn ON the machine for the first time See Fax Setup Guide to configure the settings described in Steps 2 through 4 Preparing to Use the Fax Functions 㻞㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded fro...

Page 257: ...ns Registering Destinations in the Address Book Registering and Editing One Touch Keys Registering and Editing Coded Dial Codes Registering and Editing Destinations for Group Dialing Registering Destinations in the Address Book 㻞㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 258: ...c procedure for sending a fax Basic Procedures for Sending Faxes Specifying Destinations Changing the Scan Settings Fax Canceling Fax Jobs Redialing Manual Redialing Basic Sending Procedure 㻞㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 259: ... effective only for the current sending operation To make the settings effective for all the fax operations see Changing the Default Fax Settings 4 Specify the destination Specifying Destinations Specify destinations in the following ways by entering the fax number by selecting a one touch key Basic Procedures for Sending Faxes 㻞㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 260: ...ed dialing codes the screen is displayed 5 Press Start When your fax is placed in the feeder The scan starts Your fax is sent to the destination when the scan is complete When your fax is placed on the platen glass Perform the following procedure 1 Select the size of the original document using or and press OK 2 Place the next page on the platen glass and press Start Press Start for each page 3 Wh...

Page 261: ... to send a fax see Basic Procedures for Sending Faxes Specifying destinations by entering the fax number Specify the fax number using the numeric keys Tone and Symbols To modify destinations To cancel the entered destination Press and hold Clear To delete the last character of the entered destination Press Clear Specifying destinations using one touch keys Press the one touch key 01 to 19 in which...

Page 262: ...elect is registered When group addresses are registered in coded dial codes Press Coded Dial and then enter the three digit registration number 001 to 181 with the numeric keys To select a destination from the coded dial codes you need to register group addresses in these codes in advance Registering and Editing Destinations for Group Dialing When the wrong key is pressed 1 Press Clear 2 Select Ye...

Page 263: ...the bottom of the screen to add or edit destinations Registering Destinations in the Address Book 4 Select the destination using or and press OK Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server Fax If your office has an LDAP server installed you can use the destinations registered in the server To specify destinations access an LDAP server via the machine and then search for a destination NOTE You need t...

Page 264: ...stinations Multiple search criteria can be specified at the same time 5 Specify the search criteria using the numeric keys and select Apply using or and press OK The following screen shows an example for when Name is selected in step 4 to search by personal name Pressing A a 12 toggles the input modes except for searching by fax number To specify multiple search criteria repeat steps 4 and 5 6 Sel...

Page 265: ...nations meeting your search criteria are displayed NOTE If the authentication screen appears when you click Start Search enter the user name of the machine and the password registered in the LDAP server and press Apply Registering LDAP Servers 9 Select a destination using or and press OK Up to 10 destinations can be specified To search for a destination using other search criteria repeat steps 2 t...

Page 266: ...ation using or and press OK 2 Select a destination you want to delete and press OK 3 Select Delete Destination using or and press OK 4 Select Yes using and press OK NOTE If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of destinations Instead of completing the procedure described above you can press or to toggle the destinations you specified Display a destination yo...

Page 267: ...on times 200 x 100 dpi Normal For faxes that contain text 200 x 200 dpi Fine For faxes that contain fine text 200 x 200 dpi Photo For faxes that contain photographs 200 x 400 dpi Superfine Achieves an even finer resolution than Fine 400 x 400 dpi Ultrafine Achieves an even finer resolution than Superfine Density Specify the density Decrease the density Increase the density 2 Sided Original Set the...

Page 268: ...st this setting to emphasize the outline of the image or decrease the contrast To clearly capture halftone photos adjust this setting to the appropriate level on the scale This can counteract the effect of moiré patterns uneven gradation and striped patterns To clearly capture text or lines adjust this setting to the appropriate level on the scale It is best suited for scanning blueprints and very...

Page 269: ...ing is displayed after the fax sending starts select Cancel using or and press OK You can also cancel the job by pressing Stop twice when there is a job processing When a document is loaded on the platen glass When Scan Next Press Start is displayed follow the same steps as the above 2 Select Yes using or when Cancel appears on the screen and press OK You can also cancel the job by pressing Stop T...

Page 270: ...cing Documents Supported Document Types 2 Press 3 Press Recall 4 Select history for redial using or and press OK In the history recipient name and or telephone number are displayed For sequential broadcast only one content is displayed 5 Press Start Redialing Manual Redialing 㻞㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 271: ...Recipient of an Incoming Fax by Telephone Manual Sending When fax sending from the history is restricted redialing feature is not available Restrict History TX When Restrict New Dest is set to On the saved fax sending history up to then is deleted for preventing those new destinations in the history from being redialed Restrict New Destinations When the machine is turned OFF Recently dialed number...

Page 272: ...oming Fax by Telephone Manual Sending Push button Telephone for Tone Dialing Sending a Fax Abroad Adding Pauses Sending to Multiple Destinations at a Time Sequential Broadcast Useful Features 㻞㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 273: ...ce faxes in the feeder Placing Documents Supported Document Types 3 Press 4 Specify the scan settings You cannot scan the 2 sided printing document Changing the Scan Settings Fax 5 Check for a dial tone using the handset of the external telephone Check if you hear the dial tone 6 Dial the recipient s number 7 Talk to the recipient through the handset When you hear a beep Proceed to Step 9 Notifyin...

Page 274: ...o set his her fax machine to receive your fax 9 When you hear a beep press Start and hang up the handset When the scan is complete the machine is ready to send your faxes 㻞㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 275: ...ot available The 2 sided printing document cannot be scanned The 2 sided printing scan setting will be invalid Check for a dial tone before entering the number When the number is entered before checking for a dial tone your call cannot come through or may be connected to a wrong destination Attention Manual Sending 㻞㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 276: ...ling Follow the steps in the procedure below 1 Press 2 Press Hook and check for the dial tone Check if you hear the dial tone 3 Dial the information service from which you want to receive fax es using the numeric keys 4 Respond to the prerecorded messages of the information service and press Tone You can switch to tone dialing 5 Enter the required numbers using the numeric keys Push button Telepho...

Page 277: ...6 Press Start to receive fax es 㻞㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 278: ...o this machine Check for a dial tone before entering the number When the number is entered before checking for a dial tone your call cannot come through or may be connected to a wrong destination Attention Push button Telephone for Tone Dialing 㻞㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 279: ...Press 3 Specify the scanning settings as needed Changing the Scan Settings Fax 4 Enter the international access code using the numeric keys For more information on international access codes contact your telephone company 5 Press R to enter a pause as needed The letter p is displayed to indicate that a pause is added The default pause length is two seconds To change it see Pause Time To add more p...

Page 280: ...g the numeric keys 7 Press R to add a pause to the end of the fax telephone number as needed The letter P is displayed at the end of the fax number A pause added to the end of the number is set to 10 seconds 8 Press Start 㻞㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 281: ...ions using coded dial codes Specifying destinations using group addresses Specifying destinations using the address book Specifying Destinations in an LDAP server 4 Press or to highlight a method for specifying destinations and then press OK When specifying destinations from the Address Book LDAP server or Coded Dial Specifying Destinations When specifying destinations with the numeric keys Specif...

Page 282: ...ext destination with the numeric keys and then press OK Repeat these steps to enter all the destinations 5 Repeat Step 4 to enter all the destinations 6 Press Start 㻞㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 283: ...fied using an LDAP server To specify destinations using the numeric keys Enter the numbers and press OK To delete destinations 1 Select Confirm Edit Dest using or and press OK 2 Select the destination that you want to delete using or and press OK 3 Select Delete Destination using or and press OK 4 Select Yes using the and press OK If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displ...

Page 284: ...screen after Auto Reset Timer is performed You can change the following default settings based on your needs Resolution Density 2 Sided Original Sharpness 1 Press Menu 2 Select Fax Settings using or and press OK 3 Select TX Function Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Change Defaults using or and press OK 5 Select the item using or and press OK Changing the Default Fax Settings 㻞㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downl...

Page 285: ...ness For more information see Changing the Scan Settings Fax 6 Select Apply using or after you have specified the setting and press OK 7 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻞㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 286: ...ne Type Off Hook Alarm TX Function Settings Change Defaults Register Unit Name Fax ECM TX Pause Time Auto Redial Sender ID Check Dial Tone Before Sending System settings TX Start Speed Address Book PIN Restrict New Destinations Allow Fax Driver TX Restrict History TX Fax No Confirmation Re Entry One Touch Coded Dial TX Confirmation Restrict Sequential Broadcast Changing Fax Settings Settings that ...

Page 287: ...onfiguring the send settings Follow the steps in the procedure below to configure the send settings The procedure describes the steps to change the ECM TX setting 1 Press Menu 2 Select Fax Settings using or and press OK 3 Select TX Function Settings using or and press OK 4 Select ECM TX using or and press OK 5 Configuring Send Settings 㻞㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 288: ...nu screen The procedure is complete Options Configure the following options to send a fax Fax Settings Basic Settings Register Unit Telephone Number Select Line Type Off Hook Alarm TX Function Settings Change Defaults Register Unit Name Fax ECM TX Pause Time Auto Redial Sender ID Check Dial Tone Before Sending 㻞㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 289: ... the option Menu Fax Settings Basic Settings Register Unit Telephone Number How to register the fax number Enter up to 20 digits using the numeric keys You can also enter the Register Unit Telephone Number 㻞㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 290: ...telephone company when you are not sure of the line type that you are using How to access the option Menu Fax Settings Basic Settings Select Line Type Settings Bold Default setting Pulse Select this setting when you are using a pulse line Tone Select this setting when you are using a tone line Select Line Type 㻞㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 291: ...unhooked and adjust the volume How to access the option Menu Fax Settings Basic Settings Off Hook Alarm Settings Bold Default setting Off No alarm sounds On Off Hook Alarm Volume 1 to 3 The alarm sounds at the specified volume Off Hook Alarm 㻞㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 292: ... when returned to the default screen after Auto Reset Timer is performed How to access the option Menu Fax Settings TX Function Settings Change Defaults Settings See the following section for more information Changing the Default Fax Settings Change Defaults 㻞㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 293: ...to access the option Menu Fax Settings TX Function Settings Register Unit Name Fax How to register the sender s name Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters Entering Text NOTE Where the sender s name appears on the page The information is printed at the top of each page that you are sending Register Unit Name Fax 㻞㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 294: ...is enabled on both machines An error occurs when the ECM is enabled The error may be caused by poor telephone line conditions When telephone line conditions are poor It may take additional time to send your fax if a problem occurs when sending over the telephone line How to access the option Menu Fax Settings TX Function Settings ECM TX Settings Bold Default setting Off Disable the ECM On Enable t...

Page 295: ... Sending a Fax Abroad Adding Pauses How to access the option Menu Fax Settings TX Function Settings Pause Time Setting Bold Default setting 1 to 2 to 15 sec The value varies depending on the country where you are using the machine Pause Time 㻞㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 296: ... Default setting Off Disable Auto Redial See Redialing Manual Redialing to redial the number manually On Redial Times 1 to 2 to 10 times Set the number of redial attempts Redial Interval 2 to 99 minutes Set the interval in minutes between redial attempts Redial When Err Occurs Off On Specify whether to redial the number when a sending error occurs The value varies depending on the country where yo...

Page 297: ...pient to identify the sender How to access the option Menu Fax Settings TX Function Settings Sender ID Settings Bold Default setting Off No sender ID is added On Print Location On Image Above Image Select the location where the sender ID is printed on the page Mark No as TEL FAX FAX TEL Select the symbol to be added in front of the telephone number Sender ID 㻞㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinte...

Page 298: ...X Function Settings Check Dial Tone Before Sending Settings Bold Default setting Off Do not check for a dial tone On Check for a dial tone before dialing The value varies depending on the country where you are using the machine Check Dial Tone Before Sending 㻞㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 299: ...the system settings The procedure describes the steps to change the TX Start Speed setting 1 Press Menu 2 Select System Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Communication Management Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Fax Settings using or and press OK Co...

Page 300: ...menu screen The procedure is complete Options Configure the following options to send a fax System Settings Communication Management Settings Fax Settings TX Start Speed Restrict TX Function Address Book PIN Restrict New Destinations Allow Fax Driver TX Restrict History TX Fax No Confirmation Re Entry One Touch Coded Dial TX Confirmation Restrict Sequential Broadcast 㻟㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Manu...

Page 301: ...mission problem How to access the option Menu System Settings Communication Management Settings Fax Settings TX Start Speed Settings Bold Default setting 33600 bps 14400 bps 9600 bps 7200 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps TX Start Speed 㻟㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 302: ...delete destinations How to access the option Menu System Settings Restrict TX Function Address Book PIN How to set a PIN Enter up to a 7 digit number To cancel the entered PIN clear the numbers and press OK Setting a PIN for the Address Book Address Book PIN 㻟㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 303: ...MPORTANT Restriction exceptions Entering new destinations from external telephone is not restricted When settings are not immediately applied During fax sending operation including new destinations or manual redialing operation restriction settings may not be applied immediately NOTE Redial restrictions When Restrict New Dest is set to On the saved fax sending history up to then is deleted for pre...

Page 304: ...option Menu System Settings Restrict TX Function Allow Fax Driver TX Settings Bold Default setting Off Disallow sending faxes from the fax driver installed on your computer On Allow sending faxes from the fax driver installed on your computer Allow Fax Driver TX 㻟㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 305: ...perations for example restriction settings may not be immediately applied How to access the option Menu System Settings Restrict TX Function Restrict History TX Settings Bold Default setting Off Allow sending faxes from the history On Disallow sending faxes from the history Restrict History TX 㻟㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 306: ...umber again before sending a fax How to access the option Menu System Settings Restrict TX Function Fax No Confirmation Re Entry Settings Bold Default setting Off Confirmation is not required On You are prompted to enter the fax number for confirmation Fax No Confirmation Re Entry 㻟㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 307: ...ode How to access the option Menu System Settings Restrict TX Function One Touch Coded Dial TX Confirmation Settings Bold Default setting Off Confirmation is not required On You are required confirmation before specifying a destination One Touch Coded Dial TX Confirmation 㻟㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 308: ...ngs Bold Default setting Off Allow sending faxes to multiple destinations simultaneously Confirm Sequential Broadcast The confirmation screen is displayed when you are sending faxes to multiple destinations simultaneously Reject Sequential Broadcast Disallow sending faxes to multiple destinations simultaneously Restrict Sequential Broadcast 㻟㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 309: ...R4 076 This section describes how to receive faxes RX Mode Changing the Receive Mode Advanced Settings for the Fax Tel Auto Switch Mode Receiving Faxes 㻟㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 310: ... Auto Auto mode You can receive faxes automatically The receiving method depends on whether an external telephone or the handset is connected You can set the incoming call ring time using Incoming Ring Fax Tel mode You can receive faxes automatically The telephone rings on an incoming call To disable audible incoming rings see Incoming Ring You can answer incoming calls by picking up the handset R...

Page 311: ...go to the Incoming Ring Time option 4 To specify how the machine behaves when you do not answer an incoming call go to the Action After Ring option For more information on these options see Advanced Settings for the Fax Tel Auto Switch Mode Answer mode You can receive faxes automatically The telephone s built in answer function records messages of unanswered calls 㻟㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Manuals...

Page 312: ...al mode Set this mode when you expect to receive more incoming telephone calls than faxes or when you receive few faxes 1 When Auto RX Switch is set to On the machine automatically starts receiving a fax after several rings 2 When Remote RX is set you can dial the telephone to receive faxes remotely Net Switch mode In this mode the machine distinguishes between fax and voice calls This mode is ava...

Page 313: ...ending on the type of telephone connected to it 1 Press 2 Select RX Mode using or and press OK 3 Select the receive mode using or and press OK When Fax Tel Auto Switch is selected Proceed to specify the advanced settings See Advanced Settings for the Fax Tel Auto Switch Mode Changing the Receive Mode 㻟㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 314: ...ts ringing Set the duration somewhere between 5 to 30 seconds and press OK Incoming Ring Time Set the duration during which the telephone keeps ringing when an incoming call comes Set the duration somewhere between 15 to 300 seconds and press OK Action After Ring Specify how the machine behaves when an incoming call is not answered Select End or RX and press OK End Disconnect the call RX Receive a...

Page 315: ...5 Select Apply using or and press OK The changes are saved 㻟㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 316: ...uted to when it is received an destination unknown forwarding error occurs To learn how to handle transfer errors See the following sections Configurating Operations for Transfer Errors Re forwarding Printing Deleting Documents in Which Transfer Is Failed To configure the destination in advance for automatic forwarding See Setting Document Transfer Automatic Forwarding To manually transfer receive...

Page 317: ...server Group destination 1 Press Menu 2 Select System Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Forwarding Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Off or On using or and press OK Setting Document Transfer Automatic Forwarding 㻟㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrint...

Page 318: ... On is selected You can specify where to forward You can specify only by the following approaches Specifying destinations using one touch keys Specifying destinations using coded dial codes Specifying destinations using the address book 5 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻟㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 319: ...ck Settings 1 Press Status Monitor Cancel 2 Select RX Job using or and press OK 3 Select Job Status using or and press OK 4 Select the job that you want to forward using or and press OK You cannot forward received faxes when the machine is in the middle of receiving another fax the machine starts printing a job after it has received a fax Forwarding Received Faxes Stored in Memory to Other Destina...

Page 320: ...rding destination See the following sections to specify destinations Specifying destinations using one touch keys Specifying destinations using coded dial codes Specifying destinations using the address book 㻟㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 321: ...ystem manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Store Print When Forwarding using or and press OK To print a transferred document 1 Select Print Images using or and press OK 2 Select settings using or and press OK Configurating Operations for Transfer Errors 㻟㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals...

Page 322: ... printed To save a transferred document in a memory 1 Select Store Images in Memory using or and press OK 2 Select settings using or and press OK Do Not Store When a document is transferred that document is not saved Only When Error Occurs Only when a transfer error occurs that document is saved in a memory 4 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻟㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 323: ...has been re forwarded successfully is deleted 1 Press Status Monitor Cancel 2 Select Fax Forwarding Errors using or and press OK 3 Select a job using or and press OK Detailed information of the forwarding error job is displayed To delete print a job 1 Select Delete or Print using or and press OK Re forwarding Printing Deleting Documents in Which Transfer Is Failed 㻟㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Manuals...

Page 324: ...1 Select Forward using or and press OK 2 You can specify where to forward You can specify only by the following approaches Specifying destinations using one touch keys Specifying destinations using coded dial codes Specifying destinations using the address book 㻟㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 325: ...ng and Canceling Fax Jobs Combining and Printing the Received Documents You Saved Checking and Deleting Received Faxes Checking the History of Received Sent Faxes Managing Faxes Stored in Memory 㻟㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 326: ...ncel 2 Press or to select TX Job and press OK 3 Select Job Status using or and press OK 4 Press or to select the job that you want to check or cancel and press OK The details of the selected job is displayed To cancel the job 1 Select Cancel using or and press OK Checking and Canceling Fax Jobs 㻟㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 327: ...ions will be canceled for sequential broadcast 3 Press Status Monitor Cancel to close the screen To only check the details of the selected job Press Status Monitor Cancel after you have checked the details of the selected job to close the screen 㻟㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 328: ...you can combine and print received documents saved in a memory from the Memory Lock Start Time to the Memory Lock End Time 1 Press Menu 2 Select System Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Communication Management Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Memor...

Page 329: ...r the number using the numeric keys and press OK 5 Select Off using or and press OK Fax documents saved in the memory are combined and printed 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻟㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 330: ...ts saved in the memory instead of printing during receiving Combining and Printing the Received Documents You Saved 1 Press Status Monitor Cancel 2 Select RX Job using or and press OK 3 Select Job Status using or and press OK 4 Select the job that you want to check or delete using or and press OK The details of the job is displayed Checking and Deleting Received Faxes 㻟㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Man...

Page 331: ...d press OK The job is deleted 3 Press Status Monitor Cancel to close the screen To only check the details of the selected job Press Status Monitor Cancel after you have checked the details of the selected job to close the screen 㻟㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 332: ...ing job history RX Job Confirm the received job history 3 Select Job History using or and press OK 4 Select the job that you want to check using or and press OK The details of the job is displayed 5 Select the item that you want to check using or and press OK Checking the History of Received Sent Faxes 㻟㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 333: ...6 Press Status Monitor Cancel to close the screen 㻟㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 334: ...iguring System Settings RX Function settings ECM RX Incoming Ring Remote RX Auto RX Switch Received job printing settings 2 Sided Printing Reduce RX Size RX Page Footer Continue Printing When Toner Is Low System settings RX Start Speed Memory Lock Settings R Key Setting Select Country Region Changing Fax Settings Settings that Can Be Specified Using the Menu Button 㻟㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Manual...

Page 335: ...guring the receiving settings Follow the steps in the procedure below to configure the fax receiving settings The procedure describes the steps to change the ECM RX setting 1 Press Menu 2 Select Fax Settings using or and press OK 3 Select RX Function Settings using or and press OK 4 Select ECM RX using or and press OK 5 Configuring Receiving Settings 㻟㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Ma...

Page 336: ...enu to close the menu screen The procedure is complete Options Configure the following options to receive a fax Fax Settings RX Function Settings ECM RX Incoming Ring Remote RX Auto RX Switch RX Print Settings 2 Sided Printing Reduce RX Size RX Page Footer Continue Printing When Toner Is Low 㻟㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 337: ...nabled on both machines An error occurs even when the ECM is enabled The error may be caused by poor telephone line conditions When telephone line conditions are poor It may take additional time to receive your fax if a problem occurs when sending over the telephone line How to access the option Menu Fax Settings RX Function Settings ECM RX Settings Bold Default setting Off Disable the ECM On Enab...

Page 338: ...e s speaker rings on an incoming fax only when RX Mode is set to Fax Tel Auto Switch How to access the option Menu Fax Settings RX Function Settings Incoming Ring Settings Bold Default setting Off The telephone does not ring on an incoming call On Ring Times 1 to 2 to 99 times The telephone rings on an incoming call You can set the incoming call ring time in rings in Ring Times The value varies de...

Page 339: ...ss Tone and then dial the Remote RX ID How to access the option Menu Fax Settings RX Function Settings Remote RX Settings Bold Default setting Off Disable remote retrieval On Remote RX ID 00 to 25 to 99 Enable remote retrieval You can specify the ID number in Remote RX ID The value varies depending on the country where you are using the machine Remote RX 㻟㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter co...

Page 340: ...ow to access the option Menu Fax Settings RX Function Settings Auto RX Switch Settings Bold Default setting Off Remote receiving is disabled On Incoming Ring Time 1 to 15 to 99 sec Remote receiving is enabled The machine switches to the fax mode automatically after the specified length of time Auto RX Switch 㻟㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 341: ... If the paper size switch lever is not securely attached documents may not be fed properly or jammed Copying 2 Sided Document to 2 Sides How to access the option Menu Fax Settings RX Print Settings 2 Sided Printing Settings Bold Default setting Off Print on only one side of paper On Print on both sides of paper 2 Sided Printing 㻟㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 342: ...etting Off No image reduction On Reduction Ratio Auto 97 95 90 75 Auto Reduce the image automatically to fit onto the selected paper size 97 95 90 75 Reduce the image by the predetermined ratio Reduction Method Vertical Horizontal Vertical Only Vertical Horizontal Reduce the image in vertical and horizontal directions Vertical Only Reduce the image in the vertical direction only Reduce RX Size 㻟㻠㻞...

Page 343: ... the bottom of the page when printing received faxes How to access the option Menu Fax Settings RX Print Settings RX Page Footer Settings Bold Default setting Off Do not print the page footer On Print the page footer RX Page Footer 㻟㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 344: ...learly reproduced due to a small amount of toner remaining inside the toner cartridge Plus faxes are deleted once they have been printed How to access the option Menu Fax Settings RX Print Settings Continue Printing When Toner Is Low Settings Bold Default setting Off The machine does not continue printing received faxes On The machine continues printing received faxes Continue Printing When Toner ...

Page 345: ...gure the system settings The procedure describes the steps to change the RX Start Speed setting 1 Press Menu 2 Select System Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Communication Management Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Fax Settings using or and press ...

Page 346: ... you have specified the setting and press OK 7 Press Menu to close the menu screen The procedure is complete Options Configure the following options to receive a fax System Settings Communication Management Settings Fax Settings RX Start Speed R Key Setting Memory Lock Settings Select Country Region 㻟㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 347: ... problem How to access the option Menu System Settings Communication Management Settings Fax Settings RX Start Speed Setting Bold Default setting 33600 bps 14400 bps 9600 bps 7200 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps RX Start Speed 㻟㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 348: ... Specify whether to print the RX result report when receiving a fax Activate Receive Results to enable this setting Memory Lock Time Off On When On is set received faxes are stored in memory only for a specified length of time Set Memory Lock Start Time and Memory Lock End Time respectively NOTE Memory Lock PIN Press OK without entering any numbers when you do not want to set the PIN You cannot se...

Page 349: ...arus BY Belgium BE Czech Republic CZ Denmark DK Egypt EG Finland FI France FR Germany DE Greece GR Hungary HU Ireland IE Italy IT Jordan JO Luxembourg LU Netherlands NL Norway NO Poland PL Portugal PT Russia RU Saudi Arabia SA Slovenia SI South Africa ZA Spain ES Sweden SE Switzerland CH Ukraine UA Great Britain GB Other The value varies depending on the country where you are using the machine Sel...

Page 350: ...ttings Menu System Settings Communication Management Settings Fax Settings R Key Setting Settings Boldface Default settings PSTN Select if your machine is connected to an outside line PBX Prefix Hooking Select a type for PBX When Prefix is selected set the prefix code up to 20 digits using numeric keys Tone and Symbols and then enter Recall The value varies depending on the country where you are u...

Page 351: ...ecifying the related settings to send faxes from your computer See Preparation to Use PC Faxing If a problem occurs when installing or using the driver See Where to Find Help PC Fax Sending faxes from your computer Learning about ways to send a fax See the following sections Faxing PC Fax Specifying the Default Fax Settings PC Fax Setting Up the Fax Configuration PC Fax Viewing the Online Help PC ...

Page 352: ...tem environment System Requirements PC Fax Step 2 Specify the fax settings Preparing to Use the Fax Functions Step 3 Install the fax driver Installing the MF Drivers and MF Toolbox MF Driver Installation Guide Preparation to Use PC Faxing 㻟㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 353: ...rver 2008 Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2012 Computer Any computer that runs the above systems Memory Any memory with the capacity required to operate the compatible operating systems NOTE Supported operating systems may differ according to the fax driver version you are using System Requirements PC Fax 㻟㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 354: ...n the Online Help file included with the driver additional help information is provided When clicking Help in the properties dialog box additional information about every feature and option of the driver is displayed Canon Authorized Dealers or Service Providers If the Online Help file does not provide the information you need contact your local authorized Canon dealer or service provider Where to...

Page 355: ...h as how to display the fax driver and how to send a fax from a computer Faxing PC Fax Specifying the Default Fax Settings PC Fax Setting Up the Fax Configuration PC Fax Viewing the Online Help PC Fax Faxing Fundamentals PC Fax 㻟㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 356: ...ar to the right of the screen and tap Devices the fax you are using Print If the message The printer requires your attention Go to the desktop to take care of it is displayed move to the desktop and proceed to step 3 3 Specify the send address in the Fax Sending Settings dialog box When entering the destination name and fax number When setting the destination name from the address book When enteri...

Page 357: ...e Confirm Password dialog box is displayed when you click Add to Destination List For details see the online help See the Viewing the Online Help PC Fax When setting the destination name from the address book Click Address Book in the Sending Settings tab Select the recipient click Add to List OK 㻟㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 358: ... See Viewing the Online Help PC Fax 4 If you want to attach a cover sheet click Cover Sheet tab specify a format for the cover sheet NOTE For details about cover sheet attachment view the online help See Viewing the Online Help PC Fax 5 Click OK 㻟㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 359: ... as user having access permission to the folder or click Specify a Folder in the Edit Address Book tab and specify a folder such as the My Documents folder that you have write permission for as the destination folder of the address book For details view the online help See Viewing the Online Help PC Fax The number of destinations that you can send to at one time depends on the conditions under whi...

Page 360: ...play the charm bar to the right of the screen and click or tap Settings Control Panel Devices and printers For Windows Vista click Start Control Panel Printers For Windows XP Professional Server 2003 click Start Printers and Faxes For Windows XP Home Edition click Start Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware Printers and Faxes For Windows Server 2008 on the Start menu click Control Panel and th...

Page 361: ...the online help See Viewing the Online Help PC Fax NOTE When faxing you can change the settings you configured beforehand To change the settings configure them from the application The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment 㻟㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 362: ...ndows 8 and Server 2012 From the desktop display the charm bar to the right of the screen and click or tap Settings Control Panel Devices and printers For Windows Vista click Start Control Panel Printers For Windows XP Professional Server 2003 click Start Printers and Faxes For Windows XP Home Edition click Start Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware Printers and Faxes For Windows Server 2008 ...

Page 363: ...e Get Device Status function To install Canon Driver Information Assist Service select Custom Installation when installing the driver If the fax and computer are connected via USB or a WSD Web Services on Devices port the Get Device Status function is unavailable You need to configure the settings manually 4 Confirm the settings click OK 㻟㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 364: ...ut every fax option If the e Manual does not provide the information you need see the online help NOTE The display may differ according to the operating system as well as the type and version of the printer driver 1 Click Help The online help is displayed Viewing the Online Help PC Fax 㻟㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 365: ...ng and gutters Printing documents from a USB memory Media printing You can directly print the data loaded into the USB memory which has been connected to this product Since you do not need to configure your computer you can easily print out data Using Google Cloud Print You can print without using a printer driver by using applications or services on computers or other portable devices that suppor...

Page 366: ...To print documents using AirPrint 㻟㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 367: ... and gutters Preparing for printing Preparing to use the print functions See Preparing to Print from Your Computer Setting up printer sharing See Setting Up Printer Sharing Printing Learn about ways to print from your computer See Printing Fundamentals Learning about print options See the online help to find what you can configure in each sheet Using various print options See the online help Viewi...

Page 368: ...cation software s print data to print data for the printer The printer driver for this machine has the following features The printer driver for this machine enables you to output print data at an optimum speed by dividing the workload using a computer and the printer As well as providing faster and more stable printing than conventional models the printer driver for this machine uses less memory ...

Page 369: ...uter after installation Changing the IP address of the machine Configure port settings on your computer to use the IP address of the machine NOTE The dialog box that appears on your computer The dialog box may vary slightly depending on the version of your operating system 1 Open the printer folder Basic Windows Operations 2 Right click the icon for the machine and select Printer properties or Pro...

Page 370: ...4 Click Add Port 5 Select Canon MFNP Port for Available port types and click New Port 6 Click Auto Detect 㻟㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 371: ...he machine manually You can check the IP address of the machine in Checking IP Address Settings You can check the MAC address of the machine in Checking the MAC Address 7 Select the detected printer and click Next 8 Click Add 㻟㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 372: ...9 Click Finish 10 Click Close 11 Click Apply 㻟㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 373: ... operating system as the print server To set up a computer running one of the following 32 bit operating systems as the print server the alternate printer driver cannot be downloaded from the network onto computers using 64 bit operating systems Windows XP on which no service pack or SP1 is installed Windows Server 2003 on which no service pack is installed 1 Open the printer folder Basic Windows ...

Page 374: ...ter driver The installation dialog box appears when the additional printer driver is selected and OK is clicked Browse to the folder where the printer driver files are stored and follow onscreen instructions 6 Click OK The settings for shared printer is complete NOTE To install the printer driver on another computer 1 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs Accessories Windows Explorer...

Page 375: ...splay the online help NOTE To use the printer you need an appropriate printer driver Refer to MF Driver Installation Guide and install the printer driver Printing Configuring the Default Print Settings Setting the Printer Options Viewing the Online Help Printing Fundamentals 㻟㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 376: ... the file you want to stop printing click Document Cancel In Windows 8 Server 2012 when printing from the Windows Store app if you have previously selected settings that require input or a procedure when printing such as secure printing edit preview department ID management etc the message The printer requires your attention Go to the desktop to take care of it is displayed If this happens move to...

Page 377: ... sided printing the default setting is 2 sided printing If you want to print on one side of the paper see the online help See Viewing the Online Help For information on available printing functions view the online help to find what you can configure in each sheet See Viewing the Online Help 5 Click Print or OK 㻟㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 378: ...Printing begins 㻟㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 379: ...rding to the operating system as well as the type and version of the printer driver 1 Click Start Devices and Printers NOTE For Windows 8 and Server 2012 From the desktop display the charm bar to the right of the screen and click or tap Settings Control Panel Devices and printers For Windows Vista click Start Control Panel Printers For Windows XP Professional Server 2003 click Start Printers and F...

Page 380: ...omprises a few of the basic settings of the driver The settings that you can configure in the Basic Settings tab can also be configured in other tabs For information on available printing functions view the online help to find what you can configure in each sheet See Viewing the Online Help 㻟㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 381: ... log on to your computer as a member of the Administrators group 1 Click NOTE For Windows 8 and Server 2012 From the desktop display the charm bar to the right of the screen and click or tap 6HWWLQJV ĺ RQWURO 3DQHO ĺ HYLFHV DQG SULQWHUV For Windows Vista click 6WDUW ĺ RQWURO 3DQHO ĺ 3ULQWHU RU LQGRZV 3 3URIHVVLRQDO 6HUYHU FOLFN 6WDUW ĺ 3ULQWHUV DQG D HV RU LQGRZV 3 RPH GLWLRQ FOLFN 6WDUW ĺ RQWURO ...

Page 382: ...unction If the information request returns an error message you need to configure the settings such as paper feed options manually If the printer and computer are connected via USB or a WSD Web Services on Devices port the Get Device Status function is unavailable You need to configure the settings manually The display may vary according to the operating system as well as the type and version of t...

Page 383: ...tion you need see the online help NOTE The display may differ according to the operating system as well as the type and version of the printer driver 1 Click Help The online help is displayed Topic pane right side Displays the description of the information Navigation pane left side Click Contents Search to search for information Viewing the Online Help 㻟㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com...

Page 384: ... Document name and user name displayed in the operation panel Some file name may be displayed incorrectly depending on the type of the file to be printed Checking and Canceling Print Jobs Checking Print Job History Checking and Deleting Print Jobs Checking Print Job History 㻟㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 385: ...is Turned on blinking A job is being processed Turned off No jobs are in the memory 1 Press Status Monitor Cancel 2 Select Copy Print Job using or and press OK 3 Select Job Status with or and the press OK 4 Select a job to be checked or canceled using or and press OK The detailed information is displayed Checking and Canceling Print Jobs 㻟㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 386: ...s Monitor Cancel to close the screen NOTE Pressing Stop can also delete the print jobs You can delete the print job also by pressing Stop Press Stop twice to cancel the job when the machine holds one job only For checking only Press Status Monitor Cancel to close the screen 㻟㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 387: ...g or and press OK 3 Select Print Job History with or and press OK 4 Select a job that you want to check using or and press OK 5 Select an item that you want to check using or and press OK 6 Checking Print Job History 㻟㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 388: ...Check the details 7 Press Status Monitor Cancel to close the screen 㻟㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 389: ...using or and press OK 3 Make sure that Paper Size Override is selected and press OK 4 Select Off or On using or and press OK Off An error message appears and the printing pauses without the replacement of a paper size On The paper size will be replaced However if appropriate paper is not loaded paper size replacement will not be performed 5 Changing printer settings Items to Be Specified Using Men...

Page 390: ...Press Menu to close the menu screen The setup is complete 㻟㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 391: ... file See Selecting a file to print To change print settings such as size or quantity See Changing Print Settings To print files as a list See Printing Files as a List Index Printing To change file name display format See Changing File Name Display Formats To change the default values for media printing See Changing the Default Values for Media Printing Printing Documents from a USB Memory Media P...

Page 392: ... to 32GB When a USB memory media contains more than one drive the first detected drive automatically becomes accessible Unsupported USB memory media Non standards compliant devices Devices that include built in security features Devices that need to be connected on the USB hub A USB memory card reader Devices that are connected using extension cables Other than the above some images may not be loa...

Page 393: ...into the USB memory port The machine will begin to read the device when a USB memory is inserted Do not touch or remove the device from the port 2 Press 3 Select Select File s to Print using or and press OK NOTE To sort files 1 Select Sort Files using or and press OK Printing Fundamentals USB Memory 㻟㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 394: ...t Type Brightness The settings specified here are effective only for the current task To make the settings effective for all operations see Changing the Default Values for Media Printing 6 Press Start Printing begins NOTE When removing the USB memory media form the port 1 Press Reset 2 Press Status Monitor Cancel 3 Select Device Status using or and press OK 4 Select Remove Memory Media using or an...

Page 395: ...5 Remove the USB memory media 6 Press Status Monitor Cancel to close the screen 㻟㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 396: ...1 to add to the beginning of all file names you want to select You can select more than one files if they are in the same folder Unselected if you move to a different folder To select all files in the same folder 1 Select Select All using or and press OK 2 Select Apply using or and then press OK To select a file in the folder 1 Select a folder using or and press OK or Selecting a file to print 㻟㻥㻢...

Page 397: ...r and press OK 3 Select Apply using or and press OK To clear the selection Select a file you selected using or and press OK To clear all selected files select Clear All using or and press OK 㻟㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 398: ...ns on how to print media see Printing Fundamentals USB Memory Quantity Settings Specify the quantity Paper Size Settings Specify paper size N on 1 Settings Specify the N on 1 Multiple documents are printed on one sheet of paper Off N on 1 is not performed 2 on 1 Two pages are printed onto one sheet 4 on 1 Four pages are printed onto one sheet Date Print Settings Print a date at the bottom of the d...

Page 399: ... document can be reproduced more faithfully by selecting the most appropriate original type Photo Priority Specify when you print a document including photos Text Priority Specify when you print a document including text only Brightness Settings You can adjust brightness of the printing output To darken printing outputs adjust toward the side To lighten printing outputs adjust toward the side 㻟㻥㻥㻌...

Page 400: ...MMR JPEG Image format files cannot be printed by 2 on 1 or 4 on 1 Brightness Brightness cannot be specified for TIFF JPEG Image format files Attention Changing Print Settings 㻠㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 401: ...the USB memory port The machine will begin to read the device when a USB memory is inserted Do not touch or remove the device from the port 2 Press 3 Select Index Print using or and press OK 4 Select a file to print Selecting a file to print 5 Specify the print settings as needed Printing Files as a List Index Printing 㻠㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 402: ... see Changing the Default Values for Media Printing 6 Press Start Printing begins NOTE When removing the USB memory media form the port 1 Press Reset 2 Press Status Monitor Cancel 3 Select Device Status using or and press OK 4 Select Remove Memory Media using or and press OK 5 Remove the USB memory media 6 Press Status Monitor Cancel to close the screen 㻠㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com...

Page 403: ...e Name Format using or and press OK 4 Select a file name display format using or and press OK Short File Name A file name is displayed shortly so as to be 8 letters Long File Name A file name up to 20 letters is displayed in full 5 Press Menu to close the menu screen Changing File Name Display Formats 㻠㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 404: ... File name printing Document Type Brightness File Sorting 1 Press Menu 2 Select USB Direct Print Settings using or and press OK 3 Select Change Defaults or File Sort Default Settings using or and press OK When Change Defaults is selected 1 Select the item to specify using or and press OK For details on the settings see the following items Changing Print Settings 2 Select Apply using or after you h...

Page 405: ... selected 1 Select the item to specify using or and press OK For details on the settings see the following items Printing Fundamentals USB Memory 4 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻠㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 406: ...rint an e mail or files that are attached to an e mail you can print just by using Gmail for mobile You will find your printouts when you go to the machine Preparing for Using Google Cloud Print Printing with Google Cloud Print IMPORTANT When registering the machine or when using Google Cloud Print to print documents you must be able to connect the machine to the Internet You are also responsible ...

Page 407: ...ic Network Settings Make sure that Time Date Settings and Time Zone Settings are correct Setting the Current Date and Time If the Dept ID Management is enabled make sure that the machine is configured to enable printing from a computer even when no Dept ID and PIN are entered Specifying Whether or Not to Receive a Print Job from an Unknown ID Enabling Google Cloud Print Enable the Google Cloud Pri...

Page 408: ...hine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print Register the machine with Google Cloud Print 1 Start the Remote UI and log on to the system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 㻠㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 409: ...3 Click Network Settings and select Cloud Print Settings 4 Click Register in Google Cloud Print Registration Status 㻠㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 410: ...the machine To register the machine again If you need to register the machine again such as if the owner of the machine changes deregister the machine then register it again 5 Click the link of the URL displayed for URL for Registration 6 Follow the on screen instructions to register the machine 㻠㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 411: ...r or mobile devices such as a smartphone The screens shown below are examples when you print a document from Google Chrome on a computer The print screen differs for each application Access the Google Cloud Print Web site for information on the latest applications that support Google Cloud Print 3 Specify the print settings as necessary Copies Specify the number of copies to print Color mode Speci...

Page 412: ...aper 4 Send the print data Tap or click Print depending on the device or application you are using Printing starts when the machine receives the print data To cancel printing on the machine Checking and Canceling Print Jobs For instructions on how to cancel printing from your computer or smartphone see the instruction manual for the device or application you are using IMPORTANT Depending on the co...

Page 413: ...ls iPhone 3GS or later iPod touch 3rd generation or later If you use Macintosh OS X v10 7 or later is required Network Environment Apple devices iPad iPhone iPod touch Macintosh and the machine must be connected to the same wireless LAN Printing from iPad iPhone or iPod touch 1 Make sure that the machine is turned ON and is connected to the local wireless LAN Check Wireless LAN Information MF6180d...

Page 414: ...ges to print when printing a document with multiple pages NOTE The available settings on Printer Options differ depending on the application you are using Available paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using 6 Tap Print Printing starts To cancel printing Canceling AirPrint Printing NOTE Checking the print status During printing on the Apple device press the Home button twice tap...

Page 415: ...ings from the drop down list Copies Specify the number of copies Two Sided Select the check box to make 2 sided printouts Pages Specify the range of the pages to print when printing a document with multiple pages NOTE The available settings differ depending on the application you are using 5 Click Print Printing starts To cancel printing Canceling AirPrint Printing Canceling AirPrint Printing You ...

Page 416: ...e wireless LAN If the machine is turned ON it may take several minutes before the machine is ready for wireless communication Make sure that Bonjour on Apple devices is enabled Make sure that the machine is configured to enable printing from a computer even when no department ID and password are entered Specifying Whether or Not to Receive a Print Job from an Unknown ID Changing AirPrint Settings ...

Page 417: ...gistration If you are using a mobile device such as iPad iPhone or iPod touch read click as tap in this section 3 Click Network Settings AirPrint Settings 4 Click Edit 㻠㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 418: ...mation to help you identify this machine when operating your Apple device This information is useful if you have more than one AirPrint printer NOTE If you change Printer Name If the set Printer Name is changed you may become unable to print from a Macintosh you were using This occurs because mDNS Name for IPv4 is also changed In this case add this machine to the Macintosh again Setting IPv4 DNS 㻠...

Page 419: ...irPrint Settings but also view information about consumables such as paper and toner 1 Click System Preferences in the Dock on the desktop Print Scan 2 Select your printer and click Options Supplies 3 Click Show Printer Webpage 4 Start the Remote UI and log on to the system manager mode To check the machine status or supplies you can also log on in End User Mode 㻠㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPr...

Page 420: ...eds Saving scanned documents to USB memory device You can save scanned documents to USB memory device inserted in the slot of the machine Since you do not need to configure your computer you can easily convert paper documents into electronic files Emailing scanned documents You can send scanned documents to your e mail application You can send scanned documents to your e mail application without i...

Page 421: ...Emailing scanned documents Sending scanned documents to a file server See Sending Scanned Documents to a File Server 㻠㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 422: ...g using the keys on the operation panel without operating a computer See Scanning Using Keys on the Operation Panel Scanning using the supplied software See Scanning with the MF Toolbox Scanning from an application See Scanning an Image from an Application Making full use of the scan functions Learn how to use the MF Toolbox See Using the MF Toolbox Creating one PDF file from two or more documents...

Page 423: ...equirements Scan Step 2 Install the scanner driver MF Driver Installation Guide Step 3 When the machine is connected to a network register the scanner Registering the Scanner in MF Network Scan Utility Preparing to Scan Your Document Saving to a Computer 㻠㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 424: ...nection or IPv4 to use the scan function The following server operating systems are not available Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2012 To use Hi Speed USB Your computer needs to meet the following requirements CPU Intel Pentium II or higher RAM 128 MB or higher Operating system Windows XP Service Pack 1 or later Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Driver The Hi Speed USB drive...

Page 425: ...computers can be connected to the product scanner at once via a network You cannot scan and send to an eleventh and subsequent computers If you want to scan and send to an additional computer perform one of the following procedures Display MF Network Scan Utility of another computer and clear the check box for the scanner Turn off another computer Registering the Scanner in MF Network Scan Utility...

Page 426: ...on the operation panel This allows you to scan easily using the existing settings Scanning with the MF Toolbox Scanning can be performed by operating the supplied software This allows you to scan according to your purpose with the detailed settings Scanning an Image from an Application Scanning can be performed using your application This allows you to open the scanned data as is in your applicati...

Page 427: ...ing or and press OK When multiple computers are connected the computer connected by a USB cable is listed at the top When a computer is connected by a USB cable this screen is not displayed If more than ten computers are connected via a network the eleventh and subsequent computers are not displayed you cannot scan Reduce the number of computers connected to this machine via a network Registering ...

Page 428: ...0 dpi TIFF Custom 1 Color 300 dpi JPEG Exif Custom 2 Color 300 dpi PDF Searchable Standard Scanning operation starts If you cannot scan You cannot scan when MF Toolbox setting screen is displayed Click to close the screen before starting a scan Scanning from the feeder After saving the document the display returns to the basic scanning screen Scanning from the platen glass 㻠㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded fro...

Page 429: ...s to the basic scanning screen NOTE The location of saved scanned images After scanning the folder where the images have been saved to opens automatically By default the folder for the date when you scanned the data is created in the Pictures folder in My Documents For Windows XP the folder is created in the My Pictures folder To change the scanner settings From your computer you can change the se...

Page 430: ...estination Registered in the Shortcut Key 1 Press Menu 2 Select Scan Settings using or and press OK 3 Select Shortcut Key Settings using or and press OK To store a new shortcut 1 Select Register using or and press OK 2 Select the shortcut key that you want to register using or and press OK 3 Select the connection method using or and press OK Performing a Scan Using a Shortcut Key 㻠㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloa...

Page 431: ...canner in MF Network Scan Utility You can rename the displayed computer names Using the MF Toolbox 5 Specify the scan settings using or and press OK Scan Mode Resolution File Type PDF Settings Color Scan Color 300 dpi PDF Searchable High B W Scan Black and white 300 dpi TIFF Custom 1 Color 300 dpi JPEG Exif Custom 2 Color 300 dpi PDF Searchable Standard To confirm the destination registered in the...

Page 432: ...can PC1 Scan PC2 into which the destination that you want to select is registered Scanning starts When scanning is complete the screen returns to the scan mode screen after the scanned document is saved When scanning cannot be performed You cannot perform a scan while the MF Toolbox setup screen is displayed Click to close the screen before starting a scan 㻠㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter ...

Page 433: ...der bearing the scanning date is created inside the My Pictures folder in My Documents On Windows Vista Windows 7 the folder is created in the Pictures folder To change the scan settings You can re specify the save location file format resolution and other settings from a computer See Using the MF Toolbox for more information 㻠㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 434: ...e Pages in Save as Type Creating One PDF File from Two or More Pages Paper Size in the step 6 is set to Fit the image 2 Press 3 Select Remote Scanner using or and press OK The machine is now waiting to be scanned 4 Double click the Canon MF Toolbox 4 9 icon on the desktop The MF Toolbox starts 5 Scanning with the MF Toolbox 㻠㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 435: ...Custom 2 The document will be scanned and displayed in the registered application A dialog box appears for each of the buttons NOTE Applications that can be registered in the MF Toolbox buttons The following applications can be registered in the MF Toolbox buttons if they are installed OCR Presto PageManager PDF Presto PageManager 6 Specify the scanner settings as needed Clicking Apply saves the s...

Page 436: ...the Scanner Driver check box in Step 6 The ScanGear MF dialog box will appear 1 Specify the settings as needed For details see Using the ScanGear MF 2 Click Scan Scanning starts 㻠㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 437: ...g applications Paint on Windows XP Vista 7 8 Microsoft Office XP Word 2002 Excel 2002 PowerPoint 2002 etc Microsoft Office 2000 Word 2000 Excel 2000 PowerPoint 2000 etc If you are using the applications mentioned above scan only one page at a time Place only one document in the feeder as the following problems may occur if multiple documents are placed The second and subsequent sheet documents are...

Page 438: ... Select a scanner driver The ScanGear MF or WIA driver can be used on Windows XP Vista 7 8 7 Specify the scanner settings as needed click Scan Scanning starts For details see the following Using the ScanGear MF 㻠㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 439: ... scanner and changing names for the computers You can select a scanner or change names for the computers Select Scanner Select a scanner Computer Name Specify a computer name that will appear as a destination in the machine s display Color Scan B W Scan Custom 1 Custom 2 Change comments for buttons You can enter up to 12 characters Close Toolbox after Finishing Scanning when Started from Device If...

Page 440: ...u selected 2 sided from Input Method you can also specify Binding Location This button is disabled when Platen Glass is selected in Select Source Scan Mode Select a scan mode The scan modes you can select differ depending on the MF Toolbox button you clicked Black and White Scans a document as a black and white image Black and White OCR Scans a document as a black and white image for OCR software ...

Page 441: ...es you to make advanced settings for scanning This check box is not available when scanning using the OCR button Saving locations for scanned images You can specify a file name file type and saving location for the scanned image File Name Enter a file name for the scanned image If you save a different file with the same name four digits starting from 0001 will be attached after the file name Speci...

Page 442: ...you can specify the detailed settings for the PDF file Save Scanned Image to Shows the location to save the scanned images when a setting other than PDF Add Page is selected in Save as Type To change the location click Browse select a folder and click OK Add Scanned Image to When this item appears instead of Save Scanned Image to when PDF Add Page is selected in Save as Type you can select a PDF f...

Page 443: ...ttings NOTE When scanning using Mail The MF Toolbox supports the following e mail applications Microsoft Outlook Express Microsoft Outlook Microsoft Exchange EUDORA Netscape Messenger Windows Mail Becky Ver 2 Mozilla Thunderbird Confirmation for scanned images and Exif settings Confirming the scanned image Follow the procedures below to preview the scanned images as thumbnail images and specify th...

Page 444: ...ically obtained when the image is scanned Advanced Information Displays the entered and added information Apply the Same Setting of Input Items Automatically If the check box is selected the same settings as those for the last time are specified for scanning PDF Settings When PDF PDF Single Page PDF Multiple Pages or PDF Add Page is selected for Save as Type you can specify advanced file settings ...

Page 445: ...ve when an application is specified in the E mail Program or the External Application setting You can forward the scanned images to the application Cancel Cancels the operation and returns to the previous screen All the scanned images are deleted 㻠㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 446: ...4 Double click the Canon MF Toolbox 4 9 icon on the desktop The MF Toolbox starts 5 Press the button other than OCR 6 Select PDF or PDF Multiple Pages in Save as Type 7 Specify the required settings as needed and click PDF Settings The PDF Settings dialog box appears Creating One PDF File from Two or More Pages 㻠㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 447: ...The characters may be recognized more accurately if you select English from the drop down list and set Image Quality to 300 dpi or higher in Scanner Settings PDF Compression Select High for color images such as photos or illustrations to reduce file sizes 9 Click Start When setting documents on the platen glass 1 Place the next page and click Next 2 When scanning is complete click Finish 㻠㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠...

Page 448: ... preview the image to be scanned and specify detailed scanning settings Using the Simple Mode Using the Advanced Mode Creating a Cropping Frame Determining Resolution Using the ScanGear MF 㻠㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 449: ...elect a document type in Select Source If you select Document Color ADF or Document Grayscale ADF proceed to Step 4 When selecting a document type other than Newspaper B W the automatic color correction function is activated For details on how to cancel the function see Using the Advanced Mode Photo Color Select when scanning color photos Magazine Color Select when scanning color magazines with th...

Page 450: ...ed 4 Select a purpose for the scanned image in Select Purpose Print 300dpi Image Display 150dpi OCR 300dpi Determining Resolution 5 Select an output size of the scanned image The options you can select vary depending on what you selected in Step 4 Click to change the layout orientation landscape or portrait 6 Adjust the cropping frames as needed Creating a Cropping Frame 7 Select Fading Correction...

Page 451: ...tput Size displays the Add Delete the Output Size dialog box This dialog box enables you to add and delete the custom output size Output Size List Displays the registered output size name Output Size Name Enter the output size name you want to register Width Specifies the width of the output size Height Specifies the height of the output size Unit Selects the unit of measurement for the output siz...

Page 452: ...mode 1 Display the ScanGear MF Start the ScanGear MF using one of the following methods Selecting Display the Scanner Driver in the MF Toolbox Starting from an application 2 Click Advanced Mode 3 Configure various settings Favorite Settings Input Settings Using the Advanced Mode 㻠㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 453: ...r are reset Crop Specify the scanning area Move Moves the enlarged image Zoom Enlarges or reduces the preview image Left clicking Enlarges the image Right clicking Reduces the image Left Rotate Rotates the image 90 degrees in the left Right Rotate Rotates the image 90 degrees in the right Information Displays the information of the scanned image Auto Crop Selects the cropping area of the image aut...

Page 454: ...rite Settings dialog box You can name and register the current preview image settings This item is not displayed when there is no preview image Input Settings Original Input Method Selects an input method from the following settings Platen Glass ADF 1 sided ADF 2 sided NOTE If you change this setting after previewing The preview image is deleted Input Size Select a size of the document to be scann...

Page 455: ...en and B lue Text Enhanced Scans text clearly Select when scanning text using OCR software The image is expressed in 2 colors of black and white Output Settings Output Resolution Select the scanning resolution from the drop down list or enter any value between 25 and 9600 dpi to specify the scanning resolution If you want to use the feeder or the platen glass cover enter any value between 25 and 6...

Page 456: ...htly Medium Normally this setting is recommended High Corrects faded images highly This may change the tone of the image NOTE Condition to specify the setting This setting is available when Color is selected in Color Mode and when Color Correction in the Preferences dialog box is set to Recommended Preferences Grain Correction Smooths out the film grain of the image recorded on fast film The resul...

Page 457: ...adjust the brightness and contrast of the whole image specify highlights and shadows and adjust the contrast and balance in an image The color setting buttons to be displayed vary depending on the selected Color Mode When Text Enhanced is selected no Color Settings button is displayed When a Color Settings button is clicked the dialog box appears to specify the corresponding option Clicking Reset ...

Page 458: ...yedropper tool Click this button and specify an area which you want to darken the most by clicking in the preview image or the selected cropping area You can also manually enter a value from 0 up to 245 or move on the slider Mid point eyedropper tool Click this button and specify an area where you want to make halftone by clicking in the preview image or the selected cropping area You can also man...

Page 459: ...vert the Negative Positive Image Reset Resets all the current settings to their default values Final Review This dialog box enables you to confirm the color settings Threshold You can adjust the threshold setting By adjusting the threshold you can sharpen characters in a text document and reduce back printing such as in newspapers NOTE Threshold Brightness of color and gray images is expressed by ...

Page 460: ...de This dialog box enables you to name and register a set of color settings Preferences Clicking Preferences in the Advanced Mode tab displays the Preferences dialog box You can change the settings for scanning and previewing Preview tab Preview at the Start of ScanGear Selects the preview operation when you open the ScanGear MF Automatically Execute Preview The preview starts automatically when y...

Page 461: ... setting Color Settings tab Color Correction Selects the type of color correction Recommended Vividly reproduces the tone of a document on the screen Color Matching Adjusts color to that of the scanner monitor and color printer If this item is selected the color setting buttons in the Advanced Mode tab are disabled This setting is available when Color is selected in Color Mode Always Execute the A...

Page 462: ...ring Scanning Music is played during scanning Click Browse and specify a sound file Play Sound When Scanning is Completed Music is played when scanning is completed Click Browse and specify a sound file You can specify the following files MIDI files mid rmi midi Audio files wav aif aiff MP3 file mp3 Test Scanner You can check if the scanner is functioning properly The Scanner Diagnostics dialog bo...

Page 463: ...lay the preview 2 Click Crop on the toolbar 3 Click on the preview image and drag over the areas you wish to select If you want to adjust the selected area Drag the corner or edge of the selected frame or enter the desired values for width and height in Input Settings on the Advanced Mode tab If you want to move the scanning area Click the inside of the scanning area and drag it NOTE To maintain t...

Page 464: ...cropping frames that can be specified Up to 10 cropping frames can be specified 5 Adjust the cropping frames as needed Click to select the cropping frames you want to adjust Deleting cropping frames To delete a cropping frame select the frame and perform any one of the following Click Delete on the keyboard Click Remove Cropping Frame on the toolbar Right click on the cropped area and select Delet...

Page 465: ... case you can print in sufficient quality by scanning the document in double resolution Conversely when printing an image with the length and width halved you can print properly in half resolution Resolution and data size When resolution is doubled the amount of the scanned image data is quadrupled If the data is too large this may slow the processing speed substantially resulting in failure such ...

Page 466: ...the first time See Basic Scan Flow Saving to USB Memory Device Changing the scanner settings such as the size density and image quality See Changing the Scan Settings Saving to USB Memory Device Changing the default scan settings See Changing the Default Scan Settings for Saving to USB Memory Device Saving Scanned Documents to USB Memory Device 㻠㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 467: ...ter FAT16 up to 2 GB FAT32 up to 32GB The number of files and folders that can be saved in a USB memory device is compliant with the FAT file system specification When a USB memory device contains more than one drive the first detected drive automatically becomes accessible Unsupported USB memory device Devices that do not meet USB standards Devices that have security functions installed Devices t...

Page 468: ...achine will begin to read the device when USB memory is inserted Do not touch or remove the device from the port 2 Place documents Loading Paper Supported Document Types 3 Press 4 Select Memory Media using or and press OK 5 Specify the scan settings based on your purpose of the scan Basic Scan Flow Saving to USB Memory Device 㻠㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 469: ...an Settings for Saving to USB Memory Device 6 Press Start Scanning starts When scanning from the feeder or set the File Format to JPEG After scanning the document the scanned data is sent to the USB memory When scanning from the platen glass or set File Format to other than JPEG Proceed to Step 7 7 To continuously scan the document press Start To Cancel the scan 1 Select Cancel with or and then pr...

Page 470: ... File names between SCAN0001 XXX and SCAN9999 XXX are provided XXX is the extension for the file format The two digit folder number is provided in the fifth and sixth characters from the left A maximum of 100 files can be saved in a folder NOTE When removing the USB memory device form the port 1 Press Reset 2 Press Status Monitor Cancel 3 Select Device Status using or and press OK 4 Select Remove ...

Page 471: ...how to save scanned documents to USB memory device see Basic Scan Flow Saving to USB Memory Device Scan Size Specify the scan size that matches the document size Setting Color Mode Specify color mode Color Select when scanning documents in color B W Select when scanning documents in black and white Setting the File Format Select a file format PDF Compact Saves the file in PDF format Color images s...

Page 472: ... the document Portrait Specify when the document is in portrait orientation Landscape Specify when the document is in landscape orientation Original Type You can fine tune the image quality based on the type of document The document can be reproduced more faithfully by selecting the most appropriate original type Text Best suited for scanning documents that contain text only or handwritten text an...

Page 473: ... text or lines adjust this setting to the appropriate level on the scale It is best suited for scanning blueprints and very weak pencil manuscripts Setting the Data Size You can specify the data size for when sending scanned images Small Memory Priority Only a small amount of memory is required but low quality scans are produced Standard The amount of memory required and resultant scan quality are...

Page 474: ...optimal image quality can be displayed by setting a gamma value that matches the receiving side 1 Press Menu 2 Select Scan Settings using or and press OK 3 Select Output File Image Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Color Send Gamma Value using or and press OK 5 Select gamma value using or and press OK 6 㻠㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 475: ...t is selected as the file format 1 Press Menu 2 Select Scan Settings using or and press OK 3 Select Output File Image Settings using or and press OK 4 Select PDF Compact Image Level using or and press OK 5 Select the set mode using or and press OK 㻠㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 476: ...ced Normal The amount of memory required and resultant scan quality are somewhere in the middle between Data Size Priority and Image Quality Priority Image Quality Priority A large amount of memory is required but high quality scans are produced 7 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻠㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 477: ...pens minimize these patterns by adjusting the sharpness level Changing the Scan Settings Saving to USB Memory Device When scanning a transparency Specify the image quality and adjust the density to the most appropriate level Attention Changing the Scan Settings Saving to USB Memory Device 㻠㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 478: ...owing default settings based on your needs Scan size Color Mode File Format Density Original orientation Original Type 2 Sided Original Sharpness Data Size 1 Press Menu 2 Select Scan Settings using or and press OK 3 Select Memory Media Settings using or and press OK 4 Make sure that Change Defaults is selected and press OK Changing the Default Scan Settings for Saving to USB Memory Device 㻠㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢...

Page 479: ...details about settings see Changing the Scan Settings Saving to USB Memory Device 6 Select Apply using or after you have specified the setting and press OK 7 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻠㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 480: ...E mail Changing the scanner settings such as the size density and image quality See Changing the Scan Settings E mail Configuring e mail settings such as Subject and Reply to See E mail Settings Checking Canceling send data See Checking Canceling Send Data E mail Registering sender names See Registering the E mail Sender Name Changing the default scan settings See Changing the Default Scan Setting...

Page 481: ...F files and send them to the destination e mail application as e mail attachments Please read Setting the Machine to Be Able To Send Scanned Documents and configure your e mail settings before using the e mail function Preparing to Use the E mail Functions 㻠㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 482: ... destination Specifying Destinations E mail Specify destinations in the following ways input directly by selecting a one touch key by selecting a coded dial code from the Address book in an LDAP server under sequential broadcasting 5 Specify the scan settings based on your purpose of the scan Changing the Scan Settings E mail The following settings can be changed Scanning Fundamentals E mail 㻠㻤㻞㻌㻛...

Page 483: ...dy Reply to Priority The settings specified here are effective only for the current task To make the settings effective for all e mail send operations see Changing the Default Scan Settings for Sending to E mail 7 Press Start Scanning starts 8 To continuously scan the document press Start To Cancel the scan 1 Select Cancel with or and then press OK 2 Select Yes with or and then press OK To confirm...

Page 484: ...9 Select Start Sending with or and then press OK The E mail is sent 㻠㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 485: ...mentals E mail Specifying destinations by entering the e mail address 1 Use the numeric keys to enter the destination e mail address Registering Destinations in the Address Book 2 Select Apply using or and press OK When the wrong key is pressed 1 Press Clear 2 Select Yes using and press OK To clear all the scan settings specified press Reset Specifying destinations using one touch keys Press the o...

Page 486: ...using and press OK To clear all the scan settings specified press Reset Specifying destinations using group addresses When group addresses are registered in one touch keys Press the one touch key 01 to 19 in which destination groups are registered When group addresses are registered in coded dial codes Press Coded Dial and enter the three digit registration number 001 to 181 with the numeric keys ...

Page 487: ...vance Registering Destinations in the Address Book 1 Press Address Book 2 Press or to search for your destination Select All to display all destinations Select to add or edit destinations Registering Destinations in the Address Book 3 Select the destination using or and press OK Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server E mail If your office has an LDAP server installed you can use the destination...

Page 488: ...stinations Multiple search criteria can be specified at the same time 5 Specify the search criteria using the numeric keys then use or to select Apply and press OK The following screen shows an example for when Name is selected in step 4 to search by personal name Pressing A a 12 toggles the input modes except for searching by fax number To specify multiple search criteria repeat steps 4 and 5 6 S...

Page 489: ...stinations meeting your search criteria are displayed NOTE If the authentication screen appears when you click Start Search enter the user name of the machine and the password registered in the LDAP server and press Apply Registering LDAP Servers 9 Select Apply using or and press OK Up to 10 destinations can be specified To search for a destination using other search criteria repeat steps 2 to 9 N...

Page 490: ...destination that you want to delete using or and press OK 3 Select Delete Destination using or and press OK 4 Select Yes using and press OK NOTE If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of destinations Instead of completing the procedure described above you can press to toggle the destinations you specified Display a destination you want to delete and press C...

Page 491: ...can Size Specify the scan size that matches the document size Setting Color Mode Specify color mode Color Select when scanning documents in color B W Select when scanning documents in black and white Setting the File Format Select a file format PDF Compact Saves the file in PDF format Color images such as photos or illustrations are compressed more than in PDF reducing the file size PDF Saves the ...

Page 492: ...andscape Specify when the document is in landscape orientation Original Type You can fine tune the image quality based on the type of document The document can be reproduced more faithfully by selecting the most appropriate original type Text Best suited for scanning documents that contain text only or handwritten text and drawings Blueprints and very weak pencil manuscripts can be clearly capture...

Page 493: ...ou can specify the data size for when sending scanned images Small Memory Priority Only a small amount of memory is required but low quality scans are produced Standard The amount of memory required and resultant scan quality are somewhere in the middle between Small Memory Priority and Large Image Quality Priority Large Image Quality Priority A large amount of memory is required but high quality ...

Page 494: ...ess OK 3 Select Output File Image Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Color Send Gamma Value using or and press OK 5 Select gamma value using or and press OK 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻠㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 495: ... Menu 2 Select Scan Settings using or and press OK 3 Select Output File Image Settings using or and press OK 4 Select PDF Compact Image Level using or and press OK 5 Select the set mode using or and press OK 6 Select image level using or and press OK 㻠㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 496: ... of memory required and resultant scan quality are somewhere in the middle between Data Size Priority and Image Quality Priority Image Quality Priority A large amount of memory is required but high quality scans are produced 7 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻠㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 497: ... the e mail subject Registering Destinations in the Address Book Body Enter the body of the e mail Registering Destinations in the Address Book Enter the Reply to Enter the Reply to None The Reply to is not specified Address Book Specify the Reply to Specifying the Reply to 1 Press or to search for your destination Select All to display all destinations 2 Select the destination using or and press ...

Page 498: ...Set the priority of the e mail Low The e mail is sent with low priority Standard The e mail is sent with standard priority High The e mail is sent with high priority 㻠㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 499: ...ss Stop When only one job is being processed press Stop twice to cancel the job 2 When multiple jobs are being processed select the jobs to be canceled using or and press OK 3 Select Yes using or when Cancel appears on the screen and press OK You can also cancel the job by pressing Stop The job is canceled Check with Status Monitor Cancel 1 Press Status Monitor Cancel 2 Checking Canceling Send Dat...

Page 500: ... Job History using or and press OK 4 Select the jobs to be checked using or and press OK 5 Press Status Monitor Cancel after you have checked the details of the selected job to close the screen 㻡㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 501: ...ing or and press OK 3 Select TX Function Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Register Unit Name E Mail using or and press OK 5 Enter the sender s name and press OK Registering Destinations in the Address Book Registering the E mail Sender Name 㻡㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 502: ...6 Select Apply using or and press OK 7 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻡㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 503: ...gs based on your needs Scan size Color Mode File Format Density Original orientation Original Type 2 Sided Original Sharpness Data Size Subject Body Reply to Priority 1 Press Menu 2 Select Scan Settings using or and press OK 3 Select TX Function Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Change Defaults using or and press OK Changing the Default Scan Settings for Sending to E mail 㻡㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloade...

Page 504: ...or and press OK For details about settings see Changing the Scan Settings E mail or E mail Settings 7 Select Apply using or after you have specified the setting and press OK 8 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻡㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 505: ...ethods See Scanning Fundamentals File Server Specifying the destination See Specifying the Destination File Server Changing the scanner settings such as the size density and image quality See Changing the Scan Settings File Server Checking canceling send data See Checking Canceling Send Data File Server Changing the default scan settings See Changing the Default Settings for Sending to a File Serv...

Page 506: ...canned documents into TIFF files and send them a file server Before sending to a file server see Setting the Machine to Be Able To Send Scanned Documents and configure the send settings Preparation for Scanning File Server 㻡㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 507: ...ion Specifying the Destination File Server Specify destinations in the following ways by selecting a one touch key by selecting a coded dial code from the Address book 5 Specify the scan settings based on your purpose of the scan Changing the Scan Settings File Server The following settings can be changed Scan size Color Mode File Format Scanning Fundamentals File Server 㻡㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ...

Page 508: ...g the document the scanned data is sent to the USB memory When scanning from the platen glass or set the File Format to other than JPEG Proceed to Step 7 7 To continuously scan the document press Start To Cancel the scan 1 Select Cancel with or and then press OK 2 Select Yes with or and then press OK To confirm the destination 1 Select Destinations with or and then press OK To confirm the number o...

Page 509: ...The scanned file is sent 㻡㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 510: ...gistering and Editing One Touch Keys using the Remote UI When the wrong key is pressed 1 Press Clear 2 Select Yes using and press OK To clear all the scan settings specified press Reset Specifying destinations using coded dial codes Press Coded Dial and enter the three digit registration number 001 to 181 with the numeric keys To select a destination from the coded dial codes you need to register ...

Page 511: ...played numbers To select a destination from the address book you need to register destinations in the address book in advance File server destinations can be registered only from the Remote UI Registering Destinations in the Address Book 1 Press Address Book 2 Press or to search for your destination Select All to display all destinations Registering Destinations in the Address Book 3 Select the de...

Page 512: ...ecify the scan size that matches the document size Setting Color Mode Specify color mode Color Select when scanning documents in color B W Select when scanning documents in black and white Setting the File Format Select a file format PDF Compact Saves the file in PDF format Color images such as photos or illustrations are compressed more than in PDF reducing the file size PDF Saves the file in PDF...

Page 513: ...andscape Specify when the document is in landscape orientation Original Type You can fine tune the image quality based on the type of document The document can be reproduced more faithfully by selecting the most appropriate original type Text Best suited for scanning documents that contain text only or handwritten text and drawings Blueprints and very weak pencil manuscripts can be clearly capture...

Page 514: ...an specify the data size for when sending scanned images Small Memory Priority Only a small amount of memory is required but low quality scans are produced Standard The amount of memory required and resultant scan quality are somewhere in the middle between Small Memory Priority and Large Image Quality Priority Large Image Quality Priority A large amount of memory is required but high quality scan...

Page 515: ...ess OK 3 Select Output File Image Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Color Send Gamma Value using or and press OK 5 Select gamma value using or and press OK 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻡㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 516: ... Menu 2 Select Scan Settings using or and press OK 3 Select Output File Image Settings using or and press OK 4 Select PDF Compact Image Level using or and press OK 5 Select the set mode using or and press OK 6 Select image level using or and press OK 㻡㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 517: ... of memory required and resultant scan quality are somewhere in the middle between Data Size Priority and Image Quality Priority Image Quality Priority A large amount of memory is required but high quality scans are produced 7 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻡㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 518: ... Stop When only one job is being processed press Stop twice to cancel the job 2 When multiple jobs are being processed select the jobs to be canceled using or and press OK 3 Select Yes using or when Cancel appears on the screen and press OK You can also cancel the job by pressing Stop The job is canceled Check with Status Monitor Cancel 1 Press Status Monitor Cancel 2 Checking Canceling Send Data ...

Page 519: ... Job History using or and press OK 4 Select the jobs to be checked using or and press OK 5 Press Status Monitor Cancel after you have checked the details of the selected job to close the screen 㻡㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 520: ...ing default settings based on your needs Scan size Color Mode File Format Density Original orientation Original Type 2 Sided Original Sharpness Data Size 1 Press Menu 2 Select Scan Settings using or and press OK 3 Select TX Function Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Change Defaults using or and press OK Changing the Default Settings for Sending to a File Server 㻡㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Manu...

Page 521: ...em using or and press OK For details about settings see Changing the Scan Settings File Server 7 Select Apply using or after you have specified the setting and press OK 8 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻡㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 522: ...canned documents by e mail see Configuring E Mail Send Settings To learn how to specify detailed e mail settings pre send POP authentication SSL encryption etc see Configuring Advanced E mail Settings To learn how to send scanned documents to a file server see How to Save to a File Server A Shared File Server Specifying the settings for printing sending faxes from a computer To learn about the ope...

Page 523: ...Checking the MAC address of the machine See Checking the MAC Address 㻡㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 524: ...r office After confirmation connect the machine to LAN according to the following procedures You can connect the machine to wireless LAN or wired LAN according to your environment and devices Step 1 Switch its connection method to either wired LAN or wireless LAN Switching the Connection Method to Wireless LAN or Wired LAN MF6180dw Only Step 2 Connect the machine to either wired LAN or wireless LA...

Page 525: ...K When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 When you need to switch select Select Wired Wireless LAN using or and then press OK 4 Select Wired LAN or Wireless LAN using or and then press OK Switching the Connection Method to Wireless LAN or Wired LAN MF6180dw Only 㻡㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrin...

Page 526: ...n or wireless LAN connection After you finish connecting the wireless LAN or wired LAN uninstall the MF driver Once uninstallation is complete reinstall the MF driver MF Driver Installation Guide 㻡㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 527: ...N Switching the Connection Method to Wireless LAN or Wired LAN MF6180dw Only 1 Connect the machine to a router or a hub via LAN cable 2 Wait until the machine sets the IP address automatically approx 2 min If you want to set the IP address manually see the following Setting the IPv4 Address Setting the IPv6 Address Connecting to Wired LAN 㻡㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 528: ...es not come with a LAN cable a router or a hub Have cables or a hub ready as needed The machine supports 10BASE T and 100BASE TX connections If you want to connect the machine to a 100BASE TX Ethernet network all the devices connected to the LAN router hub LAN cable and network board for computer must support 100BASE TX For details refer to your instruction manual of those devices or contact the m...

Page 529: ...ints support WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup features you can connect to the machine by using push button system or PIN code system NOTE Checking WPS Functions Check whether the box or body of the wireless LAN router or access points that you are using supports the WPS function As an example a symbol such as shown below can be seen on the shipping box or machine This supports WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup I...

Page 530: ...ect a wireless LAN router or an access point to be connected and enter a network key for connection Setting by Manually Selecting an Access Point Manual Entry Enter manually the SSID and or security information encryption type authentication method or encryption method network key of wireless LAN routers and access points to be connected to the machine Setting by Manually Entering SSID 㻡㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 D...

Page 531: ...alicious intent may gain access to personal or intranet networks without permission in order to steal your personal information or confidential information information deterrent impersonate a particular person to communicate and spread false information impersonation falsify the eavesdropped content of communications falsification destroy data or network systems by spreading computer viruses destr...

Page 532: ...2 Press Menu 3 Select Network Settings using or and then press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 4 Select Wireless LAN Settings using or and then press OK 5 Select WPS Push Button Mode using or and then press OK Setting the Machine Using WPS Push Button Mode 㻡㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsP...

Page 533: ...on the model you are using Please refer to the instruction manual for your wireless LAN routers and or access points If Cannot find Access Point appears press OK to close the screen and follow the procedure from Step 5 again 8 Make sure the Wi Fi indicator blinks When the wireless LAN router or access point is detected the Wi Fi indicator blinks 㻡㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals...

Page 534: ... the procedure again from Step 5 If you cannot detect the access point after retrying see the following Onscreen Messages 9 Wait until the machine sets the IP address automatically approx 2 min If you want to set the IP address manually see the following Setting the IPv4 Address Setting the IPv6 Address 㻡㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 535: ...6180dw Only 2 Press Menu 3 Select Network Settings using or and then press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 4 Select Wireless LAN Settings using or and then press OK 5 Select WPS PIN Code Mode using or and then press OK Setting the Machine Using WPS PIN Code Mode 㻡㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Ma...

Page 536: ...Point For details on PIN code entry methods see the instruction manual provided with the wireless LAN router or access point you are using If Cannot find Access Point appears press OK to close the screen and follow the procedure from Step 5 again 8 Make sure the Wi Fi indicator blinks When the wireless LAN router or access point is detected the Wi Fi indicator blinks 㻡㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Manu...

Page 537: ...w the procedure again from Step 5 If you cannot detect the access point after retrying see the following Onscreen Messages 9 Wait until the machine sets the IP address automatically approx 2 min If you want to set the IP address manually see the following Setting the IPv4 Address Setting the IPv6 Address 㻡㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 538: ... are not changed See the instruction manual of the wireless LAN router or access point or contact the manufacturer If the IP address on the wireless LAN router or access point are changed Enter the changed IP address 3 When the authentication screen is displayed enter a user name and a password If the user name and password are not changed See the instruction manual of the wireless LAN router or a...

Page 539: ...fer to the instruction manual of the wireless LAN router or access point or contact the manufacturer SSID It may be indicated as access point name or network name Write down all if there is multiple SSID It is used when selecting an access point in Step 8 Network Key It may be indicated as encryption key WEP key WPA WPA2 passphrase PSK or pre shared key You write down here is the network key that ...

Page 540: ... PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 5 Select Wireless LAN Settings using or and press OK 6 Select SSID Settings using or and press OK 7 Select Select Access Point using or and press OK 㻡㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 541: ...h Strong SampleNOP SSID WPA2 PSK Types of encryption 9 Channel See the following when you cannot find an access point you want to connect Checking the SSID or Network Key of the Wireless LAN Router Access Point 9 Enter the network key that you have written down in step 2 When WEP is selected When WPA WPA2 PSK is selected 1 Use the numeric keys to enter the network key Entering Text 2 Press or to h...

Page 542: ...n and start the procedure again from Step 5 If after retrying the access point it cannot be connected see the following Onscreen Messages 11 Wait until the machine sets the IP address automatically approx 2 min If you want to set the IP address manually see the following Setting the IPv4 Address Setting the IPv6 Address 㻡㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 543: ...r WPA WPA2 PSK It is used when selecting the encryption type in Step 9 WEP Authentication Method 802 11 Authentication Open System or Shared Key It is used when selecting the WPA authentication method in Step 10 WPA WPA2 PSK Encryption Method Automatic AES CCMP or TKIP or AES CCMP It is used for selecting the WPA WPA2 PSK encryption method in Step 10 Network Key It may be indicated as encryption k...

Page 544: ...ager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 5 Select Wireless LAN Settings using or and then press OK 6 Select SSID Settings using or and then press OK 7 Select Manual Settings using or and then press OK 㻡㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 545: ...lect the authentication method or encryption type that you write down using or and then press OK When the type of encryption is WEP 1 Select the authentication method with or and then press OK 2 Select Edit WEP Key using or and then press OK 3 Select a WEP key using or and then press OK Select the key number to be used for encryption which you wrote down in Step 2 㻡㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Manuals...

Page 546: ... keys to enter the network key Entering Text 2 Press or to highlight Apply and then press OK When WEP is the encryption type Select WEP keys 1 to 4 for encryption 1 Press or to highlight Select WEP Key and then press OK 2 Press or to highlight the WEP key edited in Step 10 and then press OK 12 Select Yes using and then press OK The Wi Fi indicator blinks 㻡㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter co...

Page 547: ... method or encryption method the network key are correctly entered If not enter the network key again If you cannot detect the access point after retrying see the following Onscreen Messages 13 Wait until the machine sets the IP address automatically approx 2 min If you want to set the IP address manually see the following Setting the IPv4 Address Setting the IPv6 Address 㻡㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from...

Page 548: ...e and Manuals DVD ROM in the machine If you use Macintosh computers The User Software and Manuals DVD ROM that comes with this products does not contain Canon MF LBP Wireless Setup Assistant for Macintosh 1 Insert the User Software and Manuals DVD ROM into the slot on your computer 2 Click Start Software Programs 3 Click Start for Canon MF LBP Wireless Setup Assistant Checking the SSID or Network ...

Page 549: ...Yes 5 The information for the wireless LAN router or access point is displayed Write down the information outlined in orange If a multiple access point appears Write down all of the displayed SSIDs 㻡㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 550: ...t displayed Press the Refresh button When information is not displayed even after pressing the Refresh button check that the settings for the computer and wireless LAN or access point are complete 㻡㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 551: ...k administrator to use the machine in your office IP Address Even if the product s IP address is changed the connection is maintained if the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet You may not be able to use the scan function if an IPv6 connection is used Device necessary for wireless LAN connection The machine does not come with a LAN cable or any access points Have cables or a hub rea...

Page 552: ... connection Note that you may need to specify these settings depending on your network type Setting the IPv4 Address Setting the IPv6 Address After configuring the IP address settings make sure that the network settings are correctly specified Checking IP Address Settings Setting the IP Address 㻡㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 553: ...ess setting 1 Press Menu 2 Select Network Settings using or and then press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select TCP IP Settings using or and then press OK 4 Select IPv4 Settings using or and then press OK Setting the IPv4 Address 㻡㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 554: ...en Manual Obtain is selected When Auto Obtain is selected 1 Change Auto Obtain settings Select Protocol Off Do not obtain an IP address automatically DHCP Obtain an IP address automatically using DHCP The DHCP server needs to be running BOOTP Obtain an IP address automatically using BOOTP The BOOTP daemon needs to be running RARP Obtain an IP address automatically using RARP The RARP daemon needs ...

Page 555: ... it has been entered press OK 2 Enter the subnet mask Entering Text After it has been entered press OK 3 Enter the gateway address Entering Text After it has been entered press OK 8 Press Menu to close the menu screen 9 Restart the machine Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻡㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 556: ...ARP can be used We recommend that unused protocols be disabled To use DHCP You may not be able to print after turning the power OFF and ON to restart the machine This is because a new IP address has been assigned When using DHCP consult your network administrator and perform one of the following Set the DNS dynamic update function Setting IPv4 DNS Set the machine so that it uses the same IP addres...

Page 557: ...tings using the Remote UI after you have specified the IPv4 settings 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Network Settings TCP IP Settings Setting the IPv6 Address 㻡㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 558: ...4 Click Edit in IPv6 Settings 5 Select the IPv6 check box 㻡㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 559: ...r the Stateless Address check box when not using a stateless address 7 Follow the steps in the procedure below to use a manual address Proceed to Step 8 when not using a manual address 㻡㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 560: ...s check box 2 Enter IP Address 3 Enter Prefix Length 4 Enter Default Router Address if necessary 8 Set DHCPv6 Select the Use DHCPv6 check box to use stateful DHCPv6 9 Click OK 㻡㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 561: ...10 Restart the machine Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻡㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 562: ...d an interface identifier generated from the MAC address of the machine Because a link local address is valid only within the same prefix it cannot traverse the router When the machine is using IPv6 one link local address is always set Manual Address 0 or 1 A fixed address entered manually To set the IP address manually specify the prefix length or the default router address Stateless Address 0 to...

Page 563: ... address settings 1 Press Status Monitor Cancel 2 Select Network Information using or and then press OK 3 Select IPv4 using or and then press OK 4 Select the setting to check using or and then press OK 5 Check the information Checking IP Address Settings 㻡㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 564: ...IPv6 address settings 1 Press Status Monitor Cancel 2 Select Network Information using or and then press OK 3 Select IPv6 using or and then press OK 4 Select the setting to check using or and then press OK 5 㻡㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 565: ...Check the information 6 Press Status Monitor Cancel to close the screen 㻡㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 566: ...me has elapsed Specifying a Delay Before Establishing the Network Connection When the machine is connected to a switching hub The machine may not be able to connect to a network if your network settings are configured correctly When this occurs set a delay before establishing the network connection Specifying a Delay Before Establishing the Network Connection Attention Confirming IP Address Settin...

Page 567: ...lect Network Settings using or and then press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select TCP IP Settings using or and then press OK 4 Select IPv4 Settings using or and then press OK Checking the Network Connection 㻡㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 568: ... has been entered press OK 7 Check the response When the network connection is confirmed Received response from host is displayed When the network connection is not confirmed No response from host is displayed Recheck your network settings 8 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻡㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 569: ... Before Establishing the Network Connection When the machine is connected to a switching hub The machine may not be able to connect to a network if your network settings are configured correctly When this occurs set a longer startup time Specifying a Delay Before Establishing the Network Connection Attention Checking the Network Connection 㻡㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 570: ...2008 Windows Server 2012 Computer Windows IBM PC compatibles Protocol TCP IP NOTE To print or send faxes from your computer You need to configure the following settings We recommend that these settings be performed by the network administrator Selecting the Connection Method LPD RAW WSD Configuring Printer Settings on Your Computer Setting Up Printer Sharing Setting Up Your Computer to Print and S...

Page 571: ...P network LPD RAW WSD 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Network Settings TCP IP Settings Selecting the Connection Method LPD RAW WSD 㻡㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 572: ...inting To set up WSD Printing To set up LPD printing 1 Click Edit in LPD Print Settings 2 When using LPD printing Select the Use LPD Print check box When not using LPD printing Clear the Use LPD Print check box 3 Click OK 㻡㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 573: ...he Use RAW Print check box When not using RAW printing Clear the Use RAW Print check box 3 Click OK 4 Proceed to Step 5 To set up WSD Printing 1 Click Edit in WSD Settings 2 When Use WSD Printing Select the Use WSD Printing check box When Not Using WSD Printing 㻡㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 574: ...Not Using WSD Scanning Clear the Use WSD Scanning check box 5 Select the Use Computer Scanning check box to use a computer scanner Once the Use WSD Scanning check box is selected it cannot be cleared 6 Select the Use Multicast Discovery check box to respond to a multicast search request 7 Click OK 8 Proceed to Step 5 5 Restart the machine Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds befor...

Page 575: ... computer and connect your computer to the machine The connection method varies depending on your choice of protocol Refer to the information below to choose the protocol and configure printer settings on your computer LPD A protocol generally used over TCP IP RAW A protocol used on Windows XP Vista 7 8 Server 2003 Server 2008 Server 2012 It can print faster than LPD 1 Open the printer folder Basi...

Page 576: ...Configure Port 5 Specify the settings for the LPR or RAW protocol 1 Select LPR or RAW under Protocol Type 2 Change Port Number to use a different port number 㻡㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 577: ...6 Click OK 7 Click Close 㻡㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 578: ...e machine when Auto Obtain is set to On for the IP address settings The IP Address may change with displaying the following screen When this occurs configure printer settings on your computer using this option Otherwise you may not be able to print to the machine from it Attention Configuring Printer Settings on Your Computer 㻡㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 579: ...ts be performed by the network administrator Preparing the Send Setup Utility Activating the Send Setting Utility See Activating the Send Setting Utility Settings for Sending to E Mail Destinations or File Servers To learn how to send scanned documents to e mail destinations See Configuring E Mail Send Settings To learn how to specify detailed e mail settings pre send POP authentication SSL encryp...

Page 580: ...sta Windows 7 Windows 8 Web browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 0 or later Activating via the Send Setup Tool Activate the Send Setup Utility using the Send Setup Tool provided on the User Software and Manuals DVD ROM The Send Setup Tool The Send Setup Tool supports the following system environments Operating system Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2003 Windows Server ...

Page 581: ...2 Click Start Software Programs 3 Click Start for Send Function Setting Tool 4 Click Next 㻡㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 582: ...ress When you click Search Again proceed to 3 2 Enter the IP address of the machine and click OK 3 Check that the device list is displayed on the machine and click Next If multiple devices are displayed in the list 1 Select the machine from the device list and click OK 6 Make sure the settings and then click OK 㻡㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 583: ...eb browser 2 Enter http IP address of the machine sendsupport_login html in the address field and press the ENTER key on the keyboard Input Example http 192 168 0 215 sendsupport_login html 㻡㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 584: ...uch keys Check that there is an unregistered one touch key before specifying the settings Registering and Editing One Touch Keys Check mail server settings The SMTP server name whether authentication is set and user name password for authentication are required information For mail server settings consult your provider or network administrator 1 Activate the Send Function Setting Tool Activating t...

Page 585: ...4 Register the TX mail server that you use One touch Speed From the drop down list select the One touch Speed Dial number you want to register 㻡㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 586: ...machine SMTP Server Enter the name of the SMTP server SMTP Authentication Select the Set or Not Set check box based on the authentication settings of the SMTP server User Name When Set is selected for SMTP Authentication enter the user name Password When Set is selected for SMTP Authentication enter the password 5 Click Next 6 Make sure the settings and click Register 㻡㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Man...

Page 587: ...㻡㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 588: ...mation on the required settings contact your Internet service provider or network administrator 1 Start the Remote UI and log on to the system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Network Settings E Mail Settings Configuring Advanced E mail Settings 㻡㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 589: ...4 Click Edit 5 Specify the required settings as needed and click OK 㻡㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 590: ...e encrypted if it supports SSL Use POP Authentication Before Sending To enable authentication on the POP3 server select the check box and enter up to 64 characters in the User Name text box Set Change Password To specify or change the password enter up to 32 characters in the Password text box POP Server Enter up to 48 characters for the POP3 server name address Use SSL Select the check box to use...

Page 591: ... unread e mails When selecting this check box use an e mail account exclusively for the machine Setting up SMTP authentication or encrypted communication with the SMTP server SMTP authentication SMTP AUTH uses a user name and password to authorize users to send e mails Communication with the SMTP server can be encrypted if it supports SSL Use SMTP Authentication SMTP AUTH To enable authentication ...

Page 592: ...6 Restart the machine Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻡㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 593: ...d in one touch keys The settings are registered in one touch keys Check that there is an unregistered one touch key before specifying the settings Registering and Editing One Touch Keys Check the following information The name of the computer with shared folders and the paths and folder names of shared folders are required If access restrictions are set the user name and password that were used ar...

Page 594: ...3 Click Store to Shared Folder Settings 4 Register the file server that you use 㻡㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 595: ...dress of the computer where the shared folder is located Shared Folder Name on Store Destination Computer Enter the shared name Access Restriction to Shared Folder Select the Set or Not Set check box based on the access restrictions of the shared folder Registered User Name When Set is selected for Access Restriction to Shared Folder enter the user name Password to Access When Set is selected for ...

Page 596: ...6 Make sure the settings and click Register 㻡㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 597: ...s be performed by the network administrator Setting the Speed and Duplex Specifying a Delay Before Establishing the Network Connection Setting IPv4 DNS Setting IPv6 DNS Setting the WINS Server Setting the SMB Registering LDAP Servers Setting MTU Size Configuring SNTP Configuring SLP Communication with imageWARE Additional Network Settings 㻡㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 598: ... OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Ethernet Driver Settings using or and then press OK 4 Select Auto Detect using or and then press OK 5 Setting the Speed and Duplex 㻡㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 599: ...ally Proceed to Step 11 6 Select Communication Mode using or and then press OK 7 Select the communication mode using or and then press OK Half Duplex Send and receive data in both directions but not at the same time Full Duplex Send and receive data in both directions simultaneously 8 Select Ethernet Type using or and press OK 9 Select the Ethernet type using or and then press OK 㻡㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloa...

Page 600: ...sh 100Base TX connections 10 Select Apply using or and then press OK 11 Press Menu to close the menu screen 12 Restart the machine Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻢㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 601: ...ect Network Settings using or and then press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Startup Settings using or and then press OK 4 Select the time delay before starting network communication using or and then press OK You can also enter values using the numeric keys Specifying a Delay Befo...

Page 602: ...5 Press Menu to close the menu screen 6 Restart the machine Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻢㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 603: ... associating a host name a name of a computer or a printer on a TCP IP network with an IP address 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Network Settings TCP IP Settings Setting IPv4 DNS 㻢㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 604: ...4 Click Edit in IPv4 Settings 5 Specify DNS settings 㻢㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 605: ...the domain to which the machine belongs Up to 47 characters can be entered For example example com DNS Dynamic Update Select this check box to use DNS Dynamic Update Once the check box is selected you do not need to refresh the IP address of the machine or specify Host Name and Domain Name DNS Dynamic Update Time Set the dynamic update interval from 0 to 48 hours 6 Specify mDNS settings Proceed to...

Page 606: ...uire Host Name Select the check box to acquire the host name from the DHCP server DNS Dynamic Update Select the check box to update the host name dynamically from the DHCP server Restart the machine after changes have been made to the DHCP option settings 㻢㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 607: ...8 Click OK 㻢㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 608: ... associating a host name a name of a computer or a printer on a TCP IP network with an IP address 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Network Settings TCP IP Settings Setting IPv6 DNS 㻢㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 609: ...4 Click Edit in IPv6 Settings 5 Specify DNS settings 㻢㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 610: ...te Select this check box to use DNS Dynamic Update Once the check box is selected you do not need to refresh the IP address of the machine or specify Host Name and Domain Name for LPR printing Register Manual Address Select this check box to register a manual address to the DNS server Register Stateful Address Select this check box to register a stateful address to the DNS server Register Stateles...

Page 611: ...se the mDNS Use IPv4 name for mDNS Select the check box to use the same name as IPv4 mDNS Name Enter the mDNS name when the Use IPv4 name for mDNS check box is not selected 7 Click OK 㻢㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 612: ...and host and domain names specified to the DNS server automatically This function is available in an environment where there is a dynamic DNS server To use DNS Dynamic Update You need to set the IP address host name and domain name of the DNS server Attention DNS Settings 㻢㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 613: ...you obtain the WINS server IP address from the DHCP server the IP address obtained from the DHCP server is overwritten The scan function is not available in the IPv6 environment Use it in the IPv4 environment Setting from the Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Network Settings TCP IP Settings Setting the WI...

Page 614: ...4 Click Edit in WINS Configuration 5 Specify the WINS settings 㻢㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 615: ...assigned to devices and computers It can be used regardless of the WINS resolution settings When a scope ID is not specified on the computer in your network environment leave the Scope ID field blank To register a printer on WINS server you need to set NetBIOS Name and Workgroup Name To set NetBIOS Name and Workgroup Name see Setting the SMB 6 Click OK 㻢㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com ...

Page 616: ...nd Workgroup Name 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Network Settings SMB Settings Setting the SMB 㻢㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 617: ...4 Click Edit in SMB Settings 5 Set NetBIOS Name and Workgroup Name 㻢㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 618: ... NetBIOS Name Enter the NetBIOS name of the machine Workgroup Name Enter the name of the workgroup to which the machine belongs 6 Click OK 㻢㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 619: ...stem requirements LDAP servers that are supported by the machine are Windows Server 2003 Server 2008 Server 2012 Active Directory The machine communicates with LDAP servers using LDAPv3 UTF 8 is the supported character encoding used when the text data is transmitted between the machine and an LDAP server 1 Start the Remote UI and log on to the system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Set...

Page 620: ... information Click links in the Server Name list To delete registered server information Click Delete on the right to the server name you want to delete 5 Specify the required settings as needed and click OK 㻢㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 621: ...hat you want to start search from Leaving the text box blank sets the machine to start search from an arbitrary node selected automatically Depending on the type of characters used up to 120 characters can be entered When specifying the node enter DC followed by a host name a dotdelimited character string in the Active Directory domain name and separate each of the entries with a comma If the doma...

Page 622: ...e form domain name user name When Use Security Authentication is selected enter the user name only example user1 Set Change Password To specify or change the password select the check box and enter up to 24 characters in the Password text box Domain Name When Use Security Authentication is selected for Login Information enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters for the directory tree name in Active ...

Page 623: ... the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select TCP IP Settings using or and then press OK 4 Select MTU Size using or and then press OK 5 Setting MTU Size 㻢㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 624: ...Select MTU Size using or and then press OK 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻢㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 625: ...sted based on Coordinated Universal Time UTC so specify the time zone setting before configuring SNTP Setting the Current Date and Time SNTP settings can be specified via the Remote UI NOTE The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP version 3 and SNTP versions 3 and 4 servers 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in the system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Net...

Page 626: ...4 Click Edit in SNTP Settings 5 Select the Use SNTP check box and specify the required settings 㻢㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 627: ...rval from 1 to 48 hours 6 Click OK 7 Restart the machine Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again NOTE Testing communication with the NTP SNTP server You can test whether the machine is communicating with the registered time server via SNTP Go to Settings Registration Network Settings TCP IP Settings and click Check NTP Server in SNTP Settings If a proper co...

Page 628: ...㻢㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 629: ... such a network imageWARE searches the network for the machine by using protocols such as Service Location Protocol SLP to gather information from the machine including the power status SLP settings can be specified via the Remote UI For more information on imageWARE contact your local authorized Canon dealer 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in the system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Clic...

Page 630: ... settings Specifying multicast device discovery 1 Click Edit in Multicast Discovery Settings 2 Select the Respond to Discovery check box and specify the required 㻢㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 631: ...ageWARE Scope Name To include the machine in a specific scope enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the scope name 3 Click OK Notifying imageWARE of the power status of the machine 1 Click Edit in Sleep Mode Notification Settings 2 Select the Notify check box and specify the required settings 㻢㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 632: ...er used for SLP communication with management software Number of Routers to Traverse Specify how many routers the SLP communication packets can pass Enter a number from 0 to 254 Notification Interval Specify how often the machine notifies imageWARE of its power status Enter a number in seconds from 60 to 65535 3 Click OK 5 Restart the machine Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds b...

Page 633: ... the Remote UI a native application of the machine which can be accessed through a Web browser For more information see the following section Using the Remote UI Managing the Machine 㻢㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 634: ...ty settings You can also check wireless LAN status and latest error information in the Status Monitor screen Checking Wireless LAN Information Wireless LAN Status Latest Error Information Only Checking Wireless LAN Information 1 Press Menu 2 Select Network Settings using or and then press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and nu...

Page 635: ...setting to check using or and then press OK When WEP is selected 1 Press OK 2 Select WEP settings using or and then press OK When WPA WPA2 PSK is selected 1 Press OK 2 Select WPA WPA2 PSK settings using or and then press OK 㻢㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 636: ...ireless LAN Information Wireless LAN Status Latest Error Information Only 1 Press Status Monitor Cancel 2 Select Network Information using or and then press OK 3 Select Wireless LAN Information using or and then press OK 㻢㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 637: ...4 Select the setting to check using or and then press OK 5 Check the information 6 Press Status Monitor Cancel to close the screen 㻢㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 638: ...the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Ethernet Driver Settings using or and then press OK 4 The characters numbers displayed below MAC Address is the MAC address of the machine 5 Checking the MAC Address 㻢㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 639: ...Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻢㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 640: ...I See Configuring the Remote UI Restricting Network Connections See the following sections Restricting Sending Receiving to from Specific IP Addresses Restricting Sending Receiving to from Specific MAC Addresses Monitoring Controlling Devices by SNMP SNMP Setting Setting the Permission for HTTP Communications Setting Protocol Port Numbers Setting the Dedicated Port Setting a Proxy Restricting to s...

Page 641: ...an operate the System Settings menu only when you enter the ID and PIN 1 Press Menu 2 Select System Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select System Manager Information Settings using or and press OK 4 Specify the system manager information If you specify System M...

Page 642: ...s long Entering Text Press OK after you have entered 4 Enter the PIN entered in Step 3 again Press OK after you have entered If you specify System Manager Name 1 Select System Manager Name using or and press OK 2 Specify the system manager name The name can be up to 32 characters long Entering Text Select Apply using or after you have specified the setting and press OK 㻢㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Ma...

Page 643: ...5 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻢㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 644: ...nel and the Remote UI without restriction NOTE Specifying the system manager ID and system manager PIN A number up to 7 digits can be specified If the number is less than 7 digits Example when you enter 321 the number is specified as 0000321 If you register numbers that start from 0 Example when you enter 02 002 the number is specified as 0000002 You cannot register numbers that consist of only 0 ...

Page 645: ...re specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Device Information Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Device Name using or and press OK 5 Enter the name of the machine Registering the Name of the Machine and Location 㻢㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 646: ...ting and press OK 6 Select Location using or and press OK 7 Enter the location of the machine Entering Text Select Apply using or after you have specified the setting and press OK 8 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻢㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 647: ... Dept ID Management Report Refer below for more details about the operation method when the department ID management is set Necessary Operations in Department ID Management IMPORTANT If you use the department ID management You need to specify both the system manager ID and PIN to restrict the operation of System Settings in the operation panel or the operation of Remote UI Otherwise all users are ...

Page 648: ...y to use any features of which functions are restricted the following screen is displayed A department where the feature is not restricted can select Yes and then enter its department ID and PIN to use this product 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Department ID Management Register New Department Registering Departm...

Page 649: ...igits for Department ID 2 Set the PIN Select the Set PIN check box Enter a number up to 7 digits for PIN and Confirm 3 Specify the limit functions Select the check box of the functions of which you restrict the usage 4 Click OK 㻢㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 650: ...artment You cannot change the department ID however you can delete it 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Department ID Management Editing Departments 㻢㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 651: ...ete the department ID 1 Click Delete of the department IDs which you want to delete 2 Click OK If you change the department ID 1 Click the department ID which you want to change 㻢㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 652: ... Change PIN check box Enter a number up to 7 digits for PIN and Confirm 3 Change the limit functions as needed Select the check box of the functions of which you restrict the usage 4 Click OK 㻢㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 653: ... and PIN in the following procedure Registering from the Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Department ID Management Edit Activating the Department ID Management 㻢㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 654: ... ID Management check box and then click OK Registering from the operation panel You can switch On Off of the department ID management on the operation panel 1 Press Menu 2 㻢㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 655: ...to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Dept ID Management On Off using or and press OK 4 Select Off or On using or and press OK Off Departmental ID Management is not available On Departmental ID Management is available 5 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻢㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 656: ...printer driver for which the department ID is not registered A job in which a document is scanned and is sent to a computer 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Department ID Management Edit Specifying Whether or Not to Receive a Print Job from an Unknown ID 㻢㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 657: ...ch the department ID is not registered If the check box is not selected Print jobs are not received from a printer driver for which the department ID is not registered For Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs If the check box is selected Scan jobs with unknown IDs are received If the check box is not selected Scan jobs with unknown IDs are not received 㻢㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manu...

Page 658: ...can clear the number of printed pages that have been counted 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Department ID Management Checking or Clearing the Count Information 㻢㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 659: ...n If you check the count information for each department The count information is displayed on the right side of the department ID If you clear the count information for each department 㻢㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 660: ...department ID for which you want to clear the count 2 Click Clear Count 3 Click OK If you clear the count information for all departments 1 Click Clear All Counts 㻢㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 661: ... 2 Click OK 㻢㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 662: ...rating Keys and Certificates Installing Keys and Certificates CA Certificates Verifying Keys and Certificates CA Certificates Registering Keys and Certificates CA Certificates Deleting Keys and Certificates CA Certificates Specifying Keys and Certificates CA Certificates 㻢㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 663: ...10 to 15 minutes to generate keys and certificates 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Security Settings Key and Certificate Settings Generating Keys and Certificates 㻢㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 664: ...4 Click Generate Key 5 Specify the keys 㻢㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 665: ...512bit 1024bit 2048bit or 4096bit 6 Set the certificate 1 Set the expiration date for certificate Enter dates January 1 2000 to December 31 2037 to Validity Start Date and Validity End Date 2 Specify Country Region Select the Select Country Region Name check box and for the country region name or select Enter Internet Country Code to enter the country code 㻢㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter ...

Page 666: ...te and City 4 Specify an organization You can enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for Organization and Organization Unit 5 Specify a common name You can enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters for the Common Name 7 Click OK 㻢㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 667: ... certificate is pre installed by default 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Security Settings Click Key and Certificate Settings or CA Certificate Settings Installing Keys and Certificates CA Certificates 㻢㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 668: ...4 Click Register Key and Certificate or Register CA Certificate 5 Click Install 㻢㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 669: ...6 Click Browse and then specify a file to install 7 Click Start Installation 㻢㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 670: ...iration date and or signatures 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Security Settings Click Key and Certificate Settings or CA Certificate Settings Verifying Keys and Certificates CA Certificates 㻢㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 671: ...4 Click an icon for keys or certificates you want to verify 5 Checks detailed information of the certificates 㻢㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 672: ...6 Click Certificate Verification A verification result is displayed 7 After checking the verification results click Back to Certificate Details 㻢㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 673: ...㻢㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 674: ...eys and Certificates CA Certificates You can register one key certificate and or CA certificate respectively Registering Keys and Certificates 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Security Settings Key and Certificate Settings Registering Keys and Certificates CA Certificates 㻢㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter co...

Page 675: ...4 Click Register Key and Certificate 5 Click Register 㻢㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 676: ...6 Enter a key name and a password 7 Click OK 㻢㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 677: ...es Register CA certificates for verifying authentication servers 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 㻢㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 678: ...3 Click Security Settings CA Certificate Settings 4 Click Register CA Certificate 5 㻢㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 679: ...Click Register 㻢㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 680: ...rtificates to their default settings Initializing the Key and Certificate 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Security Settings Click Key and Certificate Settings or CA Certificate Settings Deleting Keys and Certificates CA Certificates 㻢㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 681: ...4 Click Delete In the keys and or certificates used for authentication IEEE802 1X etc is displayed 5 Click OK 㻢㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 682: ...ween this product and remote UI and for IEEE802 1X authentication Registering from the Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Network Settings TCP IP Settings Specifying SSL 㻢㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 683: ...4 Click Key and Certificate under SSL Settings 5 Click Register Default Key for a key to specify from a list of keys and certificates 㻢㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 684: ...tificates you can check and verify detailed information of certificates Verifying Keys and Certificates CA Certificates 6 Click Security Settings Remote UI Settings 7 Click Edit 㻢㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 685: ...k OK 9 Restart the machine The settings become effective after restarting the machine Switch On Off on the operation panel You can switch On Off of SSL features on the operation panel IMPORTANT 㻢㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 686: ...press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Security Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Use SSL using or and press OK 5 Select Off or On using or and press OK 㻢㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 687: ...tion is available 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 7 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻢㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 688: ...X authentication TLS TTLS PEAP You can specify the following Setting TLS Authentication Information Setting TTLS PEAP Authentication Information Switching On Off for IEEE802 1X Authentication Checking Error Information for IEEE802 1X Authentication Setting IEEE802 1X Authentication 㻢㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 689: ... authentication You need to register the keys and certificates or CA certificates to be used for authentication to this product Specifying Keys and Certificates CA Certificates 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Network Settings IEEE802 1X Settings Setting TLS Authentication Information 㻢㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Manu...

Page 690: ...4 Click Edit 5 Select the Use IEEE802 1X check box 㻢㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 691: ...6 Enter a login name 7 Select the Use TLS check box 㻢㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 692: ...8 Click Key and Certificate 9 Click Register Default Key for a key to specify from a list of keys and certificates 㻢㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 693: ...s Verifying Keys and Certificates CA Certificates 10 Click OK 11 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻢㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 694: ...t are used for cross authentication IMPORTANT To specify TTLS PEAP authentication You need to configure SSL in advance Registering from the Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Network Settings IEEE802 1X Settings Setting TTLS PEAP Authentication Information 㻢㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manual...

Page 695: ...4 Click Edit 5 Select the Use IEEE802 1X check box 㻢㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 696: ...6 Enter a login name 7 Select either the Use TTLS or the Use PEAP check box 㻢㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 697: ...he PAP check box 8 Click Change User Name Password To use the login name entered to the user name at Step 6 Select the Use Login Name as User Name check box 9 Select the Change Password check box 㻢㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 698: ...er name and a password and then click OK The user name needs to be entered only when the Use Login Name as User Name check box is deselected in step 8 11 Click OK 㻢㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 699: ... the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻢㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 700: ...entication information via Remote UI in advance 1 Press Menu 2 Select Network Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select IEEE802 1X Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Off or On using or and press OK Switching On Off for IEEE802 1X Authentication 㻣㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Down...

Page 701: ...on is available 5 Press Menu to close the menu screen 6 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 702: ...ncel 2 Select Network Information using or and press OK 3 Select IEEE802 1X Error Information using or and press OK 4 Check the information 5 Press Status Monitor Cancel to close the screen Checking Error Information for IEEE802 1X Authentication 㻣㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 703: ... for IEEE802 1X authentication TLS implements cross certification between a certificate sent from an authentication server and a certificate specified for this product TLS and PEAP implement cross certification between a certificate sent from an authentication server and a user name and password specified for this product Setting IEEE802 1X Authentication We recommend that network settings be perf...

Page 704: ...olled etc Setting Secure Printing Printing by Secure Printing IMPORTANT When the secure print document job is saved in the device If the secure print document is saved in the device other print jobs may not be printed In this case print the secure print job If you still cannot print the job print the job again from the computer Entering PIN for Printing Secure Printing 㻣㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Ma...

Page 705: ...lect System Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and or the system manager PIN are specified Enter ID and the number by using numeric keys and then press Log In Out 3 Select Secure Print Settings using or and press OK 4 Select On using or and press OK Setting Secure Printing 㻣㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 706: ...t job waiting for security password input You can specify a value between 10 minutes to 240 minutes by the minute 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 7 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 707: ... print jobs may not be printed In this case print the secure print job If you still cannot print the job print the job again from the computer NOTE Printer driver screen For details on displaying the printer driver see the following Printing Configuring the Default Print Settings Sending a secure print job 1 Click any of Basic Settings Page Setup Finishing Paper Source Quality at the printer drive...

Page 708: ...3 Select OK enter a user name and PIN and then click OK 4 Click OK 5 Click OK or Print 㻣㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 709: ...me PIN Enter the numbers up to 7 digits Entering PIN for printing 1 Press Secure Print You cannot perform the secure print while waiting to scan while Remote Scanner is selected for the scan type on the basic scan screen Click Back before you perform the secure print 2 Select a user using or and press OK 㻣㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 710: ...t from other users proceed to Step 3 3 Select a document to print using or and press OK 4 Enter PIN and press OK Start printing 5 Press Status Monitor Cancel to close the Copy Print Job screen 㻣㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 711: ...take effect the settings 1 Press Menu 2 Select System Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Remote UI On Off using or and press OK 4 Select Off or On using or and press OK Configuring the Remote UI 㻣㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 712: ...ress Menu to close the menu screen 6 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 713: ...be performed by the network administrator Restricting Sending Receiving to from Specific IP Addresses Restricting Sending Receiving to from Specific MAC Addresses Monitoring Controlling Devices by SNMP SNMP Setting Setting the Permission for HTTP Communications Setting Protocol Port Numbers Setting the Dedicated Port Setting a Proxy Restricting Network Connections 㻣㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Manuals...

Page 714: ...ngle Address Multiple Addresses and Prefix Addresses combined An address consisting of all zeros cannot be specified Setting the IPv6 address Single Address Specify a single exception address at a time Multiple Addresses Specify the range of exception addresses This setting is useful when you want to specify a series of addresses such as fe80 10 to fe80 20 at a time Prefix Address Specify a prefix...

Page 715: ...3 Click Security Settings IP Address Filter 4 Click Edit in the filter which you want to specify 㻣㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 716: ...5 Set the filter 1 Select the Use Filter check box 2 Select the Reject or Allow check box For IPv4 addresses For IPv6 addresses 㻣㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 717: ...s Allow Reject accessing from computers of which addresses specified in Exception Addresses 6 Specify IP addresses To specify IPv4 addresses To specify IPv6 addresses To specify IPv4 addresses 1 Enter the IP address to be excepted 2 Click Add 㻣㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 718: ...For example 192 168 0 10 24 To specify IPv6 addresses 1 Enter the IP address to be excepted 2 Click Add Refer to the following table to enter IPv6 addresses Input Method Single Address Enter the IP address by adding colons between the groups For example fe80 10 Multiple Addresses Enter multiple addresses sequentially by adding hyphens between the addresses This specifies the range of IP Addresses ...

Page 719: ... Delete 7 Click OK 8 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 720: ...tem Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Security Settings using or and press OK 4 Select IPv4 Address Filter or IPv6 Address Filter using or and press OK 㻣㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 721: ... filter is not available On IP Address filter is available 7 Press Menu to close the menu screen 8 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 722: ...hen Wireless LAN is selected in Select Wired Wireless LAN The setting in this section is disabled A number of MAC addresses that can be specified Up to 32 MAC addresses can be specified Registering from the Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Security Settings MAC Address Filter Restricting Sending Receiving...

Page 723: ...4 Click Edit in the filter which you want to specify 5 Set the filter 1 Select the Use Filter check box 2 Select the Reject or Allow check box 㻣㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 724: ... MAC address MAC addresses not specified for Exception Addresses in Reject MAC addresses specified for Exception Addresses in Allow The machine cannot access the network when the specified MAC address does not exist When this occurs initialize security settings to regain access to the network Initializing the System Management Settings 6 Specify the MAC address 1 Enter the MAC address Enter the MA...

Page 725: ...NOTE To delete registered MAC addresses 1 Select the MAC address to delete 2 Click Delete 7 Click OK 㻣㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 726: ...egistering from the operation panel IMPORTANT When the setup is complete Restart the machine to take effect the settings 1 Press Menu 2 Select System Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 㻣㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 727: ... Address Filter using or and press OK 5 Select Send Filter or Receive Filter using or and press OK 6 Select On using or and press OK Off MAC address filter is not available On MAC address filter is available 7 㻣㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 728: ... screen 8 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 729: ... You are disallowed monitoring and modifying the settings configured for the machine or obtaining its information using the SNMP protocol Consult your network administrator before specifying the settings NOTE SNMP setting You can set On to both SNMPv1 Settings and SNMPv3 Settings You can specify port numbers used by SNMP in the following Setting Protocol Port Numbers Setting SNMPv1 Setting SNMPv3 ...

Page 730: ...and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select SNMP Settings using or and press OK 4 Select SNMPv1 Settings using or and press OK 5 Specify the SNMP protocol Setting SNMPv1 㻣㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 731: ... 1 Specify MIB access authority of the community name 1 Read Only Reading only is permitted Read Write Both reading and writing are permitted MIB Access Permission 2 Specify MIB access authority of the community name 2 Read Only Reading only is permitted Read Write Both reading and writing are permitted Dedicated Community Settings Specify On Off and MIB access authority for dedicated communities ...

Page 732: ...nu screen 5 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 733: ...SNMPv3 settings SNMPv3 Settings Details can be set only via Remote UI Registering from the Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode Starting the Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 3 Click Network Settings SNMP Settings Setting SNMPv3 㻣㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 734: ...4 Click Edit 5 Specify SNMPv3 㻣㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 735: ...ity Settings Specify securities Authentication On Encryption On Both authentication and encryption are adopted Authentication On Encryption Off Only authentication is adopted Authentication Off Encryption Off Neither authentication nor encryption is adopted Authentication Algorithm Select an algorithm to be used for authentication MD5 Use MD5 SHA1 Use SHA1 To set or change the password select the ...

Page 736: ...10 seconds before turning it back ON Registering from the operation panel You can switch On Off of SNMPv3 settings on the operation panel 1 Press Menu 2 Select Network Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select SNMP Settings using or and press OK 4 Select SNMPv3 Se...

Page 737: ...Pv3 protocol is available 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 7 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 738: ...gs using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select SNMP Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Printer Management Information From Host using or and press OK Obtaining Printer Management Information from Host 㻣㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 739: ...nter Management Information from Host is automatically obtained 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 7 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 740: ...ities such as the Remote UI and WSD printing When the setup is complete Restart the machine to take effect the settings 1 Press Menu 2 Select Network Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select TCP IP Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Use HTTP using or and pre...

Page 741: ...ow HTTP communications 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 7 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 742: ...ngs 1 Press Menu 2 Select Network Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select TCP IP Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Port Number Settings using or and press OK Setting Protocol Port Numbers 㻣㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 743: ... port number and press OK Entering Text 7 Press Menu to close the menu screen 8 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 744: ...NT When the setup is complete Restart the machine to take effect the settings 1 Press Menu 2 Select Network Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Dedicated Port Settings using or and press OK 4 Select Off or On using or and press OK Setting the Dedicated Port ...

Page 745: ...5 Press Menu to close the menu screen 6 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 746: ...roxy not only facilitates management of traffic between in house and outside networks but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates antivirus protection for enhanced security When setting a proxy make sure that you have the necessary proxy information including the IP address port number and a user name and password for authentication 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in the system manager m...

Page 747: ...4 Click Edit in Remote Maintenance Server Settings 5 Select the Use Proxy check box and specify the required settings 㻣㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 748: ...on To enable authentication by the proxy server select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the user name in the User Name text box Set Change Password To set or change the password for the proxy authentication when it is enabled select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the new password in the Password text box 6 Click OK 7 Restart the machine Tur...

Page 749: ... Can Be Specified Restricting to Send Faxes from Your Computer Restricting Sending from Job History Confirming the Entered Fax Number Confirming Destinations for One Touch Coded Dial TX Restricting Sequential Broadcasts Specifying Display Settings for the Job History Restricting to Specify Destinations and Use the Sending Functions 㻣㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 750: ...tings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Restrict TX Function using or and press OK 4 Select Address Book PIN using or and press OK 5 Setting a PIN for the Address Book 㻣㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 751: ...7 digits Press OK to display the confirmation screen When the screen appears enter the PIN again and press OK To clear the entered PIN Press Clear to delete the PIN and then press OK 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻣㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 752: ...eys and coded dial codes Edit the destinations that are registered in the address book one touch keys and coded dial codes 1 Press Menu 2 Select System Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Restrict TX Function using or and press OK 4 Select Restrict New Desti...

Page 753: ...nd press OK Off Disable the restriction On Enable the restriction You need to specify destinations using one touch keys or coded dial codes 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻣㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 754: ...ss OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Restrict TX Function using or and press OK 4 Select Allow Fax Driver TX using or and press OK 5 Restricting to Send Faxes from Your Computer 㻣㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 755: ...f or On using or and press OK Off Disallow sending faxes from the fax driver On Allow sending faxes from the fax driver 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻣㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 756: ... When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Restrict TX Function using or and press OK 4 Select Restrict History TX using or and press OK 5 Restricting Sending from Job History 㻣㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 757: ... or On using or and press OK Off Allow sending faxes from the job history On Disallow sending faxes from the job history 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻣㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 758: ...ifying a destination using the numeric keys 1 Press Menu 2 Select System Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Restrict TX Function using or and press OK 4 Select Fax No Confirmation Re Entry using or and press OK Confirming the Entered Fax Number 㻣㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Do...

Page 759: ...5 Select Off or On using or and press OK Off Do not display the screen On Display the screen 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻣㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 760: ...nu 2 Press or to highlight System Settings and then press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Press or to highlight Restrict TX Function and then press OK 4 Press or to highlight One Touch Coded Dial TX Confirmation and then press OK 5 Confirming Destinations for One Touch Coded Dial TX 㻣㻢㻜㻌㻛...

Page 761: ...Press or to highlight Off or On and then press OK Off Confirmation is not required On Confirmation is required 6 Press Menu to close the Menu screen 㻣㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 762: ...ess OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Restrict TX Function using or and press OK 4 Select Restrict Sequential Broadcast using or and press OK 5 Restricting Sequential Broadcasts 㻣㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 763: ...ax to multiple destinations Confirm Sequential Broadcast Display the confirmation screen before sending a fax to multiple destinations Reject Sequential Broadcast Disallow sending a fax to multiple destinations 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻣㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 764: ...stem Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Display Job History using or and press OK 4 Select Off or On using or and press OK Specifying Display Settings for the Job History 㻣㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 765: ...is not printed automatically On Display the job history on the status monitor cancel screen 5 Press Menu to close the menu screen 6 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 766: ...memory media connected to those USB ports Restricting External Device Connections via USB Restricting Storing of Data in Memory Media Restricting Printing of Data in Memory Media Restricting USB Port or USB Memory Usage 㻣㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 767: ...ake effect the settings 1 Press Menu 2 Select System Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select USB Device On Off using or and press OK 4 Select Off or On using or and press OK Restricting External Device Connections via USB 㻣㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter...

Page 768: ...cted to the machine 5 Press Menu to close the menu screen 6 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 769: ...the machine to take effect the settings 1 Press Menu 2 Select System Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select Memory Media Storage On Off using or and press OK 4 Select Off or On using or and press OK Restricting Storing of Data in Memory Media 㻣㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Download...

Page 770: ...emory media 5 Press Menu to close the menu screen 6 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 771: ...rt the machine to take effect the settings 1 Press Menu 2 Select System Settings using or and press OK When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are specified Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number and then press Log In Out 3 Select USB Direct Print On Off using or and press OK 4 Select Off or On using or and press OK Restricting Printing of Data in Memory Media 㻣㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Download...

Page 772: ...ory media 5 Press Menu to close the menu screen 6 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine to take effect the settings Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 773: ...omputer using the Remote UI Start the Remote UI in a Web browser to access the machine over the network Using the Remote UI See Using the Remote UI Learning the functions of the Remote UI See the Help of the Remote UI Screen Layout of the Remote UI Setting and Managing from Computer 㻣㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 774: ... Settings Settings Registration Network Settings SNMP Settings SNMPv3 Settings User Settings Settings Registration Network Settings SNMP Settings SNMPv3 Settings Context Settings Settings Registration System Settings Department ID Management Department ID Page Total Settings Registration Security Settings Key and Certificate Settings Settings Registration Security Settings CA Certificate Settings ...

Page 775: ...ating system Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Web browser Internet Explorer 7 0 or later Macintosh Operating system Mac OS 10 5 8 or later except for Classic environment Web browser Safari 3 2 1 or later Operating Environment 㻣㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 776: ...2 Start the Web browser 3 Enter http IP address of the machine in the address field and press the ENTER key on the keyboard Input Example http 192 168 0 215 4 Log on to the Remote UI When the department ID management is not set 1 Select Management Mode or End User Mode 2 Management Mode Enter System Manager ID and System Manager PIN End User Mode Enter User Name 3 Click Log In Starting the Remote ...

Page 777: ...Mode Allow checking the device status confirming settings and viewing jobs You can also handle the jobs queued by your user name that you enter upon logon When the department ID management is set 1 Enter Department ID and PIN 2 Click Log In 㻣㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 778: ...5 Display the Remote UI top page log in screen when the machine is in log out status 6 Create an E mail to the system manager specified in System Manager Information 7 Display Help for the currently displayed page in a separate window 8 Display the current job status and history etc 9 Display the settings registration items of the machine 10 Display the coded dial codes and one touch keys register...

Page 779: ...d page 5 Move the scroll box up to the top of the page Settings Registration Page 1 Display the list of device settings 2 Display the portal page of Remote UI 3 Display the hierarchy of the currently displayed page By clicking this the relevant page is displayed 4 Move the scroll box up to the top of the page NOTE 㻣㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 780: ...oded dial codes 3 Move the scroll box up to the top of the page 4 Display the portal page of Remote UI 5 Display the hierarchy of the currently displayed page By clicking this the relevant page is displayed 6 Display the address of the number selected by List Number for Coded Dial page only NOTE About the change of Address Book You can change the address book only if you log on in Management Mode ...

Page 781: ...ing the Current Settings Setting up the menu options See Setting Up the Menu Options A brief overview of the menu options and checking how to configure these options See the following sections Network Settings Preferences Timer Settings Common Settings Copy Settings Fax Settings Scan Settings USB Direct Print Settings Printer Settings Adjustment Maintenance System Settings Initialize Menu Setting ...

Page 782: ...0FR4 0JX To view the current settings print the user data list Printing the User Data List Printing and Viewing the Current Settings 㻣㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 783: ...gs Scan Settings USB Direct Print Settings Printer Settings Adjustment Maintenance System Settings Initialize Menu 3 Press or to select a submenu and press OK For details on the submenus see Contents of the Menu Options 4 Press OK to save the changes to the selected menu or select another submenu option Select Apply when Apply appears on the screen and press OK to apply the setting 5 Setting Up th...

Page 784: ...Press Menu to close the menu screen NOTE To display the previous screen Press Back When Menu is pressed before pressing OK Changes will not be saved 㻣㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 785: ...ings Preferences Timer Settings Common Settings Copy Settings Fax Settings Scan Settings USB Direct Print Settings Printer Settings Adjustment Maintenance System Settings Initialize Menu Contents of the Menu Options 㻣㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 786: ...Using WPS PIN Code Mode SSID Settings Enter the WEP key or PSK needed to connect with the access point Select Access Point Manual Settings Connecting to Wireless LAN MF6180dw Only Setting by Manually Entering SSID Wireless LAN Information It displays information about the current wireless LAN connection MAC Address Wireless LAN Status Latest Error Information Channel SSID Settings Security Setting...

Page 787: ...Off On DNS Dynamic Updt Time 0 to 24 to 48 hr Setting IPv4 DNS mDNS Settings Enables DNS functionality without a specific server such as DNS Off On mDNS Name Setting IPv4 DNS DHCP Option Settings Specify whether to acquire the Host Name and whether to perform DNS Dynamic Update Acquire Host Name Off On DNS Dynamic Update Off On Setting IPv4 DNS IPv6 Settings IPv6 is a communication protocol equiva...

Page 788: ... WINS Server Address 0 0 0 0 Scope ID Setting the WINS Server LPD Settings LPD is a print application available in Windows Mac OS X UNIX and Linux This is generally used in a TCP IP protocol network environment Off On Selecting the Connection Method LPD RAW WSD RAW Settings RAW is a print application available in Windows When using RAW printing speed is faster than when using LPD Off On Selecting ...

Page 789: ...Community Name and access rights used by SNMP Off On Community Name 1 Public Community Name 2 Not Set MIB Access Permission 1 Read Only Read Write MIB Access Permission 2 Read Only Read Write Dedicated Community Settings Off Read Write Read Only Setting SNMPv1 SNMPv3 Settings Specify whether to use SNMPv3 Off On Setting SNMPv3 Printer Management Information From Host Specify whether to acquire pri...

Page 790: ...lex Ethernet Type 10 Base T 100 Base TX On Setting the Speed and Duplex MAC Address A MAC address is a particular number assigned to each communication device computers printers etc connected to a network Checking the MAC Address IEEE802 1X Settings Uses IEEE802 1X to assigns authentication for the machine Off On Switching On Off for IEEE802 1X Authentication Initialize Network Settings Reset the ...

Page 791: ...e Tone Adjust the fax sound volume when sending is complete Off On TX Done Volume 1 to 3 Only When Error Occurs TX Done Volume 1 to 3 Adjusting the Volume RX Done Tone Adjust the fax sound volume when receiving is complete Off On RX Done Volume 1 to 3 Only When Error Occurs RX Done Volume 1 to 3 Adjusting the Volume Scanning Done Tone Adjust the fax sound volume when scanning is complete Off On Sc...

Page 792: ...es whether the machine makes a sound it is in Energy Saver mode Off On Adjusting the Volume Display Settings Settings Descriptions Select Default Screen Select the default screen displayed when the machine is turned ON or after auto reset is performed Copy Fax Scan USB Direct Print Setting the Default Screen Language Select the display language for the machine English 1 French Spanish German Itali...

Page 793: ...splay Off On Adjusting the Display Brightness Contrast and Invert Screen Colors mm Inch Entry Switch Set the unit of measurement for the paper size mm Inch Changing Units of Measurement Message Display Time Set the duration during which each message is displayed on the screen 1 to 2 to 5 seconds Changing Message Display Time Scrolling Speed Adjust the speed to scroll the menu when all the menu ite...

Page 794: ...ur AM PM 24 Hour Setting the Current Date and Time Current Time Settings A Specifies the current time and date Setting the Current Date and Time Time Zone Settings Set the time zone GMT 12 00 to GMT 0 00 to GMT 12 00 Setting the Current Date and Time Daylight Savings 2 Set the daylight savings time option Off 1 On Start M W D End M W D Setting the Current Date and Time Sleep Timer Set a timer to e...

Page 795: ...t is performed Default Screen Selected Screen Specifying the Screen that Is Displayed after Auto Reset Is Performed Auto Offline Time Specify a timer to return to the scanner offline mode after the machine has been idle for a specified length of time 0 Off 1 to 5 to 60 min Setting the Auto Offline Time 㻣㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 796: ... Drawer 1 Off On Drawer 2 Off On Other Multi Purpose Tray Off On Drawer 1 Off On Drawer 2 Off On Setting a Paper Source to Be Used for Each Function Switch Paper Feed Method When you print on paper with a preprinted logo you can print so the position of the logo is correctly adjusted without needing to replace paper in the drawer for either 1 sided or 2 sided printing You can specify the settings ...

Page 797: ...0FR4 0K5 Change Defaults Register new copy settings Changing the Default Settings Copy Settings 㻣㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 798: ...pe Off Hook Alarm Specify whether to sound an alarm when the handset or the telephone handset is left unhooked and adjust the volume Off On Off Hook Alarm Volume 1 to 3 Off Hook Alarm TX Function Settings Settings Descriptions Change Defaults You can register scan settings for documents Change Defaults Register Unit Name Fax Register your name or company s name sender s name Register Unit Name Fax...

Page 799: ...ender ID Mark No as TEL FAX Select the text to add in front of the number FAX TEL Sender ID Check Dial Tone Before Sending You can specify whether to dial after checking the dial tone when sending fax documents Off 1 On Check Dial Tone Before Sending RX Function Settings Settings Descriptions ECM RX You can specify whether to use ECM Off On ECM RX Incoming Ring Set whether or not to ring the hands...

Page 800: ... Printing Reduce RX Size You can reduce the size of received documents and print them Off On Ratio Auto 97 95 90 75 Direction Vertical Horizontal Vertical Only Reduce RX Size RX Page Footer You can specify whether to print information such as reception date when printing received documents Off On RX Page Footer Continue Printing When Toner Is Low Specify whether to continue printing received docum...

Page 801: ...e Output File Image Settings Settings Descriptions Color Send Gamma Value When sending scanned images you can specify the gamma value when the images that were scanned in RGB are converted to YCbCr When sending the images optimal image quality can be displayed by setting a gamma value that matches the receiving side Gamma 1 0 Gamma 1 4 Gamma 1 8 Gamma 2 2 Changing the Scan Settings Fax Changing th...

Page 802: ...a Printing File Sort Default Settings You can register file sort order Name Ascending Name Descending Date Time Ascending Date Time Descending Changing the Default Values for Media Printing File Name Format You can change the file name format later Short File Name Long File Name Changing File Name Display Formats USB Direct Print Settings 㻤㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 803: ...is menu LTR LGL STMT EXEC No 10 COM10 Monarch DL ISO C5 ISO B5 A4 A5 B5 Changing printer settings Items to Be Specified Using Menu Button Paper Size Override When no paper size defined within the job is loaded in the machine the paper size in the document is automatically converted to the default paper size specified in the printer driver as shown in the table below Paper size defined within the d...

Page 804: ...Menu Button Gutter Specify gutter or the amount of space between adjacent pages to adjust for binding Specify a positive value to increase the amount of blank space between adjacent pages or a negative value to decrease the amount of blank space between adjacent pages 50 0 to 0 0 to 50 0 mm Changing printer settings Items to Be Specified Using Menu Button Offset Short Edge Front Specify a value to...

Page 805: ... Second Changing printer settings Items to Be Specified Using Menu Button Personality Select the machine s personality to handle a job printed from a non device specific printer driver The text may be garbled on the output if the personality is not configured appropriately on the machine Auto PS PCL Changing printer settings Items to Be Specified Using Menu Button PCL Settings Descriptions Paper S...

Page 806: ...VNMATH VNUS WIN30 WINBALT WINL1 WINL2 WINL5 DESKTOP ISO11 ISO15 ISO17 ISO21 ISO4 ISO6 ISO60 ISO69 ISOL1 ISOL2 ISOL5 ISOL6 LEGAL MATH8 MCTEXT MSPUBL PC1004 PC775 Changing printer settings Items to Be Specified Using Menu Button Custom Paper Specify a custom paper size Select On to enter the page dimensions Off On Changing printer settings Items to Be Specified Using Menu Button Unit of Measure Spec...

Page 807: ...enu Button PS Settings Descriptions Job Timeout Specify a timeout period so the next job in the queue can start after a specified time period has elapsed By default the timeout is set to 0 0 to 3600 Second Changing printer settings Items to Be Specified Using Menu Button Print PS Errors Specify whether to print an error report when a PostScript error occurs Off On Changing printer settings Items t...

Page 808: ...Platen Glass 3 to 0 to 3 Adjusting Black Text in Color Documents Black Text Processing Adjustment in Color Documents Special Processing Settings Descriptions Special Mode U Due to the paper type e g heavy paper or usage conditions e g dry conditions toner smudges and spatters appear on the output When this occurs set the setting to ON Off On Special Mode Special Mode V Paper the printed side curls...

Page 809: ... or usage conditions When this occurs set the setting to ON In addition the machine runs more quietly in the middle of a print run when this setting is set to ON Off On Special Mode Special Mode D Toner smudges and spatters appear on the output due to the paper type or usage conditions When this occurs set the setting to ON In addition the machine runs more quietly in the middle of a print run whe...

Page 810: ...ng the System Manager Information Device Information Settings Register the machine name and installation site Device Name Up to 32 characters Location Up to 32 characters Registering the Name of the Machine and Location Dept ID Management On Off Settings Descriptions Dept ID Mngt On Off Specify whether to use Dept ID Management Off On Activating the Department ID Management Security Settings Setti...

Page 811: ... Settings Specifies whether to save received documents in memory without printing them out Off On Memory Lock Settings Memory Lock PIN Specifies a PIN number seven digits necessary for changing Memory Lock Settings Memory Lock Settings Print Report Specifies whether to print Receive Results information Off On Memory Lock Settings Memory Lock Time Specifies whether to receive documents only within ...

Page 812: ...ng the Remote UI Restrict TX Function Settings Descriptions Address Book PIN Set a PIN to protect the address book When you specify a PIN you need to enter the registered PIN before registering destinations Setting a PIN for the Address Book Restrict New Destinations Specifies whether to permit specifying of destinations using the numeric keys Off On Restricting Destinations that Can Be Specified ...

Page 813: ... etc Off On Specifying Display Settings for the Job History USB Device On Off Specifies whether to use the USB port on the rear side of the machine Off On Restricting External Device Connections via USB Memory Media Storage On Off Specify whether to save scan data to a USB memory device Off On Restricting Storing of Data in Memory Media USB Direct Print On Off Specifies whether to allow printing f...

Page 814: ...tions Via PC Via Internet Initialize Key and Certificate Resets to default status by initializing the key and certificate Follow the onscreen instructions Initializing the Key and Certificate Initialize Address Book Resets the address book to its default status Follow the onscreen instructions Initializing the Address Book Initialize System Settings Resets the system settings to the default values...

Page 815: ...On Off Product Extended Survey Program On Off Cloud Print Settings Confirm Paper Settings Secure Print Settings Select PDL Plug n Play Initialize All Initializing the System Management Settings 㻤㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 816: ...fault values Preferences Timer Settings Common Settings Copy Settings Fax Settings Scan Settings USB Direct Print Settings Printer Settings Initialize All Initializing the Menu Initialize Menu 㻤㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 817: ... the screen See Onscreen Messages When a problem has occurred Read this section before requesting service See Troubleshooting When print quality is not good See Printing Results Are Not Good When you want to uninstall the software See MF Driver Installation Guide When the problem cannot be resolved after referring to the appropriate trouble shooting section See When a Problem Cannot Be Resolved Tr...

Page 818: ...tion on the reports refer to the following Printing the Report Automatically What follows is a list of error code descriptions and corresponding remedies 001 003 005 012 018 022 037 099 401 404 406 408 701 703 752 753 755 801 802 804 806 810 812 813 822 839 841 844 846 852 853 861 863 995 001 Problem A document jams in the feeder Action Remove the jammed document Document Jams in the Feeder 003 Er...

Page 819: ...pient s machine is turned OFF or the line is busy a fax may not be sent Ask the recipient to check the machine status or wait for a while and send the fax again When sending the fax overseas insert pauses in the fax number Sending a Fax Abroad Adding Pauses 022 Problem 1 Sending of a fax from a computer is disabled Action To send a fax from a computer you need to set Allow Fax Driver TX to On For ...

Page 820: ...ory device due to an error Action 1 Remove the USB memory device and insert it again Basic Scan Flow Saving to USB Memory Device Action 2 Reduce the number of pages in the scan original Action 3 Make sure that USB memory is formatted with a file system that is supported by the machine FAT16 or FAT32 408 Problem 1 USB memory was disconnected while being read from and reading failed Action Check if ...

Page 821: ...and turn it back ON 752 Problem 1 An e mail could not be sent because an incorrect SMTP server name was set Action Check the SMTP server name and correct the setting Configuring E Mail Send Settings Problem 2 An e mail could not be sent because an incorrect domain name was set Action Check the domain name and correct the setting Setting IPv4 DNS Setting IPv6 DNS Problem 3 An e mail could not be se...

Page 822: ...red folder an error occurred from the folder Action Check whether the shared folder and the computer that has the shared folder are running correctly 802 Problem The SMTP server name is not set correctly Action Set the SMTP server name correctly Configuring E Mail Send Settings 804 Problem No access privileges to access the shared folder are granted Action Check whether the user name and password ...

Page 823: ...dministrator Configuring Advanced E mail Settings 813 Problem The logon name that is used for POP authentication is not set correctly Action Enter the logon name that is used for POP authentication correctly 822 Problem An image file in a USB memory device could not be printed because the format of the image file is not supported Action Store the image in a supported file format so that you may be...

Page 824: ...g is inserted into an outlet firmly 853 Problem 1 A document could not be printed because its data size exceeded the machine s upper processing capability Action The machine may not be able to print documents with many pages Reduce the number of pages per printing or print again when no print job is queued or no document is being printed If you are still unable to print check the document data for...

Page 825: ...printed due to a defect in its data Action Check the document data for any defects 863 Problem An error occurred when printing from a computer Action Turn OFF the machine wait for at least 10 seconds and turn it back ON After the restart is complete try printing again 995 Problem A document waiting to be sent was canceled Action Send the document again as necessary 㻤㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from Manual...

Page 826: ...l telephone depending on your telephone system IMPORTANT To save documents in memory when the power supply is cut off If the power is lost due to a power failure or the power cord is accidentally unplugged data can be stored in memory for approximately 5 minutes so you can back it up To store document in the memory requires the machine s built in battery must be charged for more than 16 hours The ...

Page 827: ...hine is still ON If it is turned OFF the data that is printing will be erased If the jammed paper is torn Remove all torn pieces of paper to avoid further jams If paper jams occur repeatedly Check the followings Fan the paper stack and tap the edge on a flat surface to align the paper before loading it into the machine Make sure that the paper you are using meets the requirements for use Supported...

Page 828: ...or damage to the machine NOTE Do not force the jammed document or paper out of the machine Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line for assistance if needed 㻤㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 829: ...move jammed documents 1 Press 2 Remove the document loaded in the feeder 3 Open the feeder cover 4 Move the release lever A to the position shown in the figure 5 Remove the jammed document by pulling it gently Document Jams in the Feeder 㻤㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 830: ...6 Open the inner cover 7 Remove the jammed document by pulling it gently 8 Lift the document feeder tray and remove the document by pulling it gently 㻤㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 831: ...t feeder tray back into place 10 Close inner cover 11 Close the feeder cover 12 Open the feeder or the platen glass cover and remove the document by pulling it gently 㻤㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 832: ...13 Close the feeder or the platen glass cover gently 14 Place documents in the feeder 㻤㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 833: ...ve jammed paper 1 Press 2 Lift the scanning platform 3 Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out gently 4 Lower the scanning platform 5 When the following screen appears select Yes using and press OK Paper Jams in the Output Area 㻤㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 834: ...The machine is ready to print 㻤㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 835: ...ng it out gently If it cannot be removed easily do not pull it out forcibly Perform the procedure at the position that is indicated on the message display 3 When the following screen appears select Yes using and press OK The machine is ready to print Paper Jams in the Multi Purpose Tray 㻤㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 836: ...o pull out this drawer halfway 3 Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out gently 4 Set the paper drawer If the optional paper drawer Drawer 2 is installed close the optional paper drawer also If Confirm Paper Settings is set to On a confirmation screen appears when the paper drawer is set in the machine Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer Drawer 1 or 2 㻤㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manu...

Page 837: ... System Settings 5 When the following screen appears select Yes using and press OK The machine is ready to print 㻤㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 838: ...steps below to remove jammed paper 1 Press 2 Open the back cover 3 Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out gently 4 Close the back cover 5 Open the lower rear cover Paper Jams in the Back Cover and Duplex Unit 㻤㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 839: ...jammed paper by pulling it out gently 7 Close the lower rear cover 8 When the following screen appears select Yes using and press OK The machine is ready to print 㻤㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 840: ...g down the open button 4 Remove the toner cartridge Immediately place the toner cartridge into the original protective bag or wrap it with a thick cloth 5 Hold the green tabs A and push the transport guide forward and down Paper Jams in the Front Cover 㻤㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 841: ... pulling it out gently Remove it as horizontally as possible so that loose toner does not spill out 7 Slowly move the transport guide to its original position 8 Hold the part where the green seal is attached and open the roller cover 9 Remove the document by pulling it gently 㻤㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 842: ...sides of the toner cartridge into the guides located on both sides of the machine and slide the toner cartridge into the machine until the toner cartridge comes to rest and is held against the back of the machine 12 Close the front cover 㻤㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 843: ...een tabs A open the 2 sided transport guide 4 Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out gently If it cannot be removed easily do not pull it forcibly Proceed to Step 5 Paper Jams in the 2 sided Transport Guide 㻤㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 844: ...ide are closed 6 Set the paper drawer If Confirm Paper Settings is set to On a confirmation screen appears when the paper drawer is set in the machine System Settings 7 When the following screen appears select Yes using and press OK The machine is ready to print 㻤㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 845: ...r example a part of the image may not be printed at all Changing the paper size in the Paper Settings menu to match the size loaded in the paper drawer or multi purpose tray Cancel the job and refer to Setting the Paper Size and Type to change the paper size in Paper Settings menu IMPORTANT When printing from the printer driver Make sure that the paper size specified in the printer driver also mat...

Page 846: ...heck security settings Could not connect More than one access point was detected Dept ID is not set Register from Remote UI Incorrect number of characters invalid characters entered Incorrect Size Setting Insert toner cartridge Memory is full Memory is full Enter original type settings again Memory is full Scanning canceled Print Memory full Process secure print jobs Memory Media is restricted New...

Page 847: ...e paper drawer Loading Paper Setting the Paper Size and Type Problem 2 An adjustment image that is required for correction is not placed on the platen glass correctly Action Place the adjustment image on the platen glass with the print side face down and the black stripe toward the left side of the machine Correcting Copy Images Problem 3 Paper jammed during correction Action Remove the jammed pap...

Page 848: ...g the Machine Using WPS PIN Code Mode Entering the PIN Code in the Wireless LAN Router Access Point For details on how to push the WPS button or to enter PIN code refer to the instruction manual for your wireless LAN routers and or access points or contact their manufactures Problem 2 The connection method was not selected correctly Action Select the correct method and connect again Checking the S...

Page 849: ...error Action 1 Check whether the machine is properly installed and correctly connected to the network Connecting to Wired LAN Connecting to Wireless LAN MF6180dw Only Action 2 A port that is used for Cloud Print may be blocked by a firewall or other protection Check whether port 5222 is available with your computer Action 3 If using a proxy server on the network check whether the proxy settings fo...

Page 850: ... sure that the front cover is completely closed Computer is restricted Problem Scanning that is operated by using a computer is disabled in the Department ID Management Action Log on to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode display the edit screen of the corresponding Department ID and select the Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs check box Specifying Whether or Not to Receive a Print Job from an Unk...

Page 851: ...s or access points within connection range were detected Multiple wireless LAN routers and or access points cannot be connected simultaneously by holding down their respective WPS buttons Action Wait for a while and try again Setting the Machine Using WPS Push Button Mode Dept ID is not set Register from Remote UI Problem Attempted to enable Dept ID Management On Off but no department IDs are regi...

Page 852: ...ax Action 5 If scanning change the file format to reduce its file size Changing the Scan Settings Saving to USB Memory Device Problem 2 A scanned document could not be stored to a USB memory device due to insufficient memory space Action Delete unnecessary data to free space in the USB memory device or connect a different USB memory device Memory is full Enter original type settings again Problem ...

Page 853: ...ngs do not allow you to register new destinations or edit the destinations registered in the address book or one touch keys Action If you want to register new destinations or edit the registered destinations you need to change the setting Contact your administrator for more information Restricting Destinations that Can Be Specified No Paper Problem 1 There is no paper in the paper drawer or multi ...

Page 854: ...age appears when Fax No Confirmation Re Entry in Restrict TX Function in System Settings is set to On Action Make sure to enter the same number Open authentication failed Check WEP settings Problem 1 Connection failed because the machine uses open system authentication while the wireless LAN router or access point used is set to Shared Key authentication Action Change the WEP authentication method...

Page 855: ...blem Scanning that is operated by using a computer is disabled in the Department ID Management Action Log on to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode display the edit screen of the corresponding Department ID and select the Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs check box Specifying Whether or Not to Receive a Print Job from an Unknown ID Remove paper from output tray Problem The output paper is backed u...

Page 856: ... Problem 2 The authentication method of the machine is set to Shared Key but that of the wireless router is set to Open System Action Change the WEP authentication method to Shared Key at the wireless router and connect again For more information about how to change see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer Setting by Manually Selecting an Access Point Se...

Page 857: ...nication failure Action 1 Turn OFF the machine and turn it back ON and then repeat the setup again Action 2 Check network connection Wireless LAN Troubles MF6180dw Only If the access point cannot be determined even after checking the network connection check the security settings on the wireless LAN router or access point When security settings on the wireless LAN router access point are changed W...

Page 858: ...roken using a voltmeter Turn ON the power switch See the Getting Started If this works proceed to Has the power switch been just turned ON Has the power switch been just turned ON Wait a few moments until the machine starts and warms up If this works proceed to Is the machine in the sleep mode Is the machine in the sleep mode Press Energy Saver on the operation panel to return from the sleep mode ...

Page 859: ...onfigured properly Is the telephone line connected or configured properly Make sure that the telephone cable is properly connected Make sure that the cables for the telephone line port and external device port on the back of the machine are not connected inversely See the Getting Started Make sure that the line type dial or push specified in the menu matches the type of line connected to the machi...

Page 860: ... purpose tray meets the paper specifications Supported Paper Types Make sure to load the same size and type of paper into the paper drawer or multi purpose tray Paper jams occur repeatedly Make sure that the paper is properly loaded Loading Paper Make sure that the number of sheets or the paper type loaded in the paper drawer or multi purpose tray meets the paper specifications Supported Paper Typ...

Page 861: ...0FR4 0L4 Sending Problems Receiving Problems Fax Problems 㻤㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 862: ...firmation is required when specifying a destination Check the setting set for Fax No Confirmation Re Entry Confirming the Entered Fax Number Unable to send a fax over the optical line Use of the optical line is not guaranteed Memory is insufficient to send a fax High volume documents or sending documents in high image quality may exceed the maximum memory capacity Set the appropriate image quality...

Page 863: ...ass or feeder s scanning area to remove the spots if necessary If the sheet has no spots the receiving fax machine may be the cause of dirty prints Cleaning the Platen Glass Cleaning the Feeder Automatically Cleaning the Feeder Make sure that the document is properly placed Placing Documents When a fax printed out by the receiving fax machine is smaller than its actual size Make sure that the appr...

Page 864: ...ocessing Data indicator blinking YES The external phone or handset is busy Please wait until the external phone or handset is not busy NO Has an error occurred during a transmission YES Print the transmission management report to check for errors Communication Management NO Have you checked to see if the receiving fax machine is having problems NO Make sure that the receiving fax machine is compat...

Page 865: ...a fax to an international destination Sending a Fax Abroad Adding Pauses Change the initial sending speed TX Start Speed 㻤㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 866: ... is connected to the machine Also make sure that it is always turned on and the recorded answering message can be heard anytime Print send or delete jobs stored in memory Modes cannot switch automatically between telephone and fax See the following section Modes Cannot Switch Automatically between Telephone and Fax Cannot receive a fax manually Make sure the machine is set to receive faxes manuall...

Page 867: ...d verify that the resolution of the sender s machine has been set properly Cannot obtain documents from information services Make sure to set the telephone line type to tone dialing If the type is set to the rotary pulse press Tone to switch to tone dialing Follow the instructions provided from information services Errors occur frequently while receiving faxes Ask the sender to check his her fax m...

Page 868: ...If the setting time is too short incoming faxes may be treated as incoming calls of the external telephone or the handset Set Ring Start Time to a longer setting Advanced Settings for the Fax Tel Auto Switch Mode NO Is the line condition of the sender s machine good NO Change the RX Start Speed RX Start Speed YES Is memory full YES Print send or delete jobs stored in memory NO Can the sender s mac...

Page 869: ...e Getting Started YES Is the toner cartridge installed properly NO Install the toner cartridge properly Replacing the Toner Cartridge YES Is there sufficient toner in the toner cartridge NO To view the onscreen instructions see the following Replacing Toner Cartridges YES Is the sender s machine functioning properly NO Ask the sender to make sure the scanning components of the machine are clean Fa...

Page 870: ...elected or vice versa For a landscape document one side is copied top to bottom and the reverse side bottom to top when Book Type is selected When Calendar Type is selected both sides are copied top to bottom 2 Sided Copying The copy output is askew Adjust the document guides to fit the document Placing Documents in the Feeder Make sure that the number of sheets or the paper type loaded in the pap...

Page 871: ...oved even after Image adjustment Perform Copy Image Adjustment again Before doing so place ten sheets of blank paper on the test chart placed on the platen glass Correcting Copy Images Documents cannot be scanned Up to fifty documents can be loaded in the feeder The fifty first and subsequent documents are not scanned 㻤㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 872: ...the toner cartridge installed properly NO Install the toner cartridge properly Replacing the Toner Cartridge YES Is there sufficient toner in the toner cartridge NO If a toner cartridge has reached the end of its life replace the toner cartridge with a new one Replacing Toner Cartridges YES Have you cleaned the scanning components or fixing unit NO Clean the scanning components or fixing unit Clea...

Page 873: ...copying on the correct side of the paper using If the copy result is not satisfactory try to copy your document on the other side 㻤㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 874: ...ided documents Specify the 2 sided printing options in the printer driver See the Online help The printout is printed askew Make sure that the number of sheets or the paper type loaded in the paper drawer or multi purpose tray meets the paper specifications Supported Paper Types Adjust the paper guides to the paper size If the problem persists load paper with the other side face up or in an opposi...

Page 875: ...int Settings YES Is the USB cable properly connected NO Reconnect the USB cable and check the connection status If necessary try a different USB cable YES Does the USB port of your computer properly work NO Restart your computer and the machine and connect the machine to a different USB port on your computer YES Are you connected with the wireless LAN YES Check the following The distance between w...

Page 876: ...If there is no improvement Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻤㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 877: ...rint to the following port s list If not select the right port and press OK If the port is not found see Configuring Port Settings over a TCP IP Connection and create a new port YES Is the TCP IP network properly set up NO Check to see if the IP address is entered correctly Checking IP Address Settings When setting the IP address through DHCP BOOTP or RARP note that the DHCP BOOTP or RARP server n...

Page 878: ...s refer to the instruction manual of the wireless LAN router access point or contact the manufacturer If there is no improvement Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻤㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 879: ...are no microwave ovens or refrigerators near the installation area When multiple networks are used to avoid interference between the channels each network will be set to a channel that is as far apart from other network channels as possible such as Ch 1 Ch 6 and Ch 11 For information on checking and setting methods for channels refer to the instruction manual of the wireless LAN router or access p...

Page 880: ...ted Clean the platen glass and feeder s scanning area Scanned images cannot be displayed correctly if displayed smaller than the actual size depending on the application Scale the images to 100 Set the display colors to High Color 16 bit or 24 bit or higher in Display Properties A scanned image is displayed larger or smaller than its actual size on the computer screen Try one of the following to s...

Page 881: ... installed NO Install it MF Driver Installation Guide YES Is the machine registered in the MF Network Scan Utility NO Register the machine Registering the Scanner in MF Network Scan Utility YES Are ten or fewer computers connected to this machine over the network NO Reduce the number of computers connected to this machine over the network Registering the Scanner in MF Network Scan Utility YES Is t...

Page 882: ...Windows XP Vista 7 8 windows system32 CNCMFP46 INI 2 In the ScanSize section change Read512Bytes 0 to Read512Bytes 1 and save the file Do not modify any other parts NO After installing the software that comes with this machine did you install a TWAIN compatible application YES There is a possibility that TWAIN may have been replaced by a wrong one If this happens you are unable to perform a scan T...

Page 883: ...nnect or the wrong number is dialed When you hear the dial tone enter the number where you want your calls If you enter the number before you hear the dial tone the call may not connect or you may inadvertently dial the wrong number Telephone Problems 㻤㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 884: ...0FR4 0LR Wired LAN Troubles Wireless LAN Troubles MF6180dw Only Network Problems 㻤㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 885: ...on beyond routers Use it within the same segment an environment which does not go beyond a router Make sure that IPv4 Address Filter IPv6 Address Filter or MAC Address Filter is not specified for the machine If it is specified change the setting so that IP address and MAC address of your computer can be permitted Restricting Sending Receiving to from Specific IP Addresses Restricting Sending Recei...

Page 886: ... does not need to traverse the dial up router configure the dial up router so that the broadcast does not traverse it If the broadcast needs to traverse the dial up router run a check the dial up router settings When a DNS server exists in the external network specify the destination IP address instead of the host name This also applies when the device to which you want to connect the machine and ...

Page 887: ... seconds before turning it back ON YES Is the machine connected to the router or hub using the correct LAN cable No Use a Category 5 or higher twisted pair cable for the LAN YES When using the router Is the LAN cable for the machine and computer connected to the router LAN port No If the cable is connected to the WAN port of the router or the internet port connect it to the LAN port If the LAN cab...

Page 888: ...are changed The Remote UI is not displayed Check the DHCP function of the wireless LAN router or access point network key At factory shipment the machine s default settings have DHCP and Auto IP enabled so it obtains an IP address automatically Enable the DHCP function on the wireless LAN router or access point and repeat the setup again DHCP function A function that automatically assigns an IP ad...

Page 889: ...t is set to Off You can set On to both SNMPv1 Settings and SNMPv3 Settings When SNMPv1 Settings is set to On the machine cannot be recognized when accessed from the utility software with a community name different from the machine setting If it cannot be recognized check your community name Monitoring Controlling Devices by SNMP SNMP Setting Make sure that Dedicated Port Settings is On Setting the...

Page 890: ...t on the same network and the device registered on the DNS server exists in the external network run a check the settings When security settings on the wireless LAN router access point are changed Certain settings on the wireless LAN router or access point will not allow connection communication with the machine Connection communication with the machine is not possible under the following settings...

Page 891: ...nicate without changing the settings of the wireless LAN router access point input the settings manually Setting by Manually Entering SSID Automatically generated WEP key on wireless LAN router or access point Hexadecimal To communicate without changing the settings of the wireless LAN router access point input the settings manually 㻤㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 892: ... Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON YES Does the installation area of the wireless LAN router or access point and machine conform to the following The distance between access points is within 50 m may vary on the communication speed or environmental condition There are no obstacles between the access point and the machine No microwave ovens or refrigera...

Page 893: ...applications including anti virus software before uninstalling the software The Canon folder remains in the Start menu after the software has been uninstalled Uninstall the MF Toolbox first before uninstalling the MF drivers If you uninstall the MF drivers first the Canon folder may remain after the MF Toolbox has been uninstalled Follow the steps in the procedure below to remove the folder For Wi...

Page 894: ... evaporates from damp paper due to the heat generated inside the fixing unit it is most likely to occur at low room temperatures This is not a malfunction but you can prevent this by using a stack of new unopened paper Should you smell something burning immediately turn OFF the machine unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help l...

Page 895: ...per or Following Paper Has Smudge Marks Printout is missing or has unneeded space A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed NOTE To contact your local authorized Canon dealer When a problem occurs that is not suggested in the e Manual or a problem persists if you follow the instructions or you cannot determine the nature of the problem contact your local authorized Canon dealer Printing Results Are Not...

Page 896: ...ration panel Special Mode The effect becomes greater as the number goes up Off Mode 1 Mode 2 low high Paper curls and creases can be minimized by changing the paper type and usage conditions without needing to change the setting The more effective the setting becomes the slower the print speed Cause 2 The paper type loaded is not appropriate Solution Make sure that the number of sheets or the pape...

Page 897: ...pecifications Supported Paper Types Cause 4 There is a foreign object inside the machine Solution Remove the foreign object from the machine Cause 5 Paper creases due to the paper type used or usage conditions of the machine Solution Change the Special Mode V setting from the operation panel Special Mode The effect becomes greater as the number goes up Off Mode 1 Mode 2 low high Paper curls and cr...

Page 898: ...following solutions according to the cause Cause The scanning portion is dirty Solution Clean the scanning portion Cleaning the Feeder Vertical Lines Not in the Original Appear 㻤㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 899: ...tive the setting the lower the density becomes Additionally the outline of text and images may be reproduced less clearly and images may appear slightly jagged If you cannot solve the problem even setting Special Mode X set Special Mode D to On Solution 3 To print received faxes or the print report Change the Special Mode C setting to On from the operation panel To apply the solutions to all the j...

Page 900: ... Off Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 low high Streaks can be minimized by changing the paper type or usage conditions without needing to change the setting If you set this option to On the printing speed will be slow 㻥㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 901: ...aper or usage conditions for example dry conditions toner smudges and spatters appear on the output Solution Change the Special Mode U setting to On from the operation panel Special Mode Set this setting to Off unless the above mentioned problem occurs The print quality may become lower when this setting is enabled depending on the paper type used for example thin paper or usage conditions humid c...

Page 902: ...10 mm for envelopes Provide a margin around the data Printable Area Solution 2 Perform the following procedure in the printer driver 1 Display the Finishing tab 2 Click Advanced Settings 3 Set Enlarge Print Area to Off The Bottom Edge of Paper or Following Paper Has Smudge Marks 㻥㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 903: ...rinted with a margin of 5 mm 10 mm for envelopes Provide a margin around the data Printable Area Solution 2 Perform the following procedure in the printer driver 1 Display the Finishing tab 2 Click Advanced Settings 3 Set Enlarge Print Area to Off A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed 㻥㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 904: ...ear side of the machine or on the label on inside of the machine s front cover Place of purchase Nature of the problem Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results WARNING If the machine makes strange noises or emits smoke or an odd odor Turn OFF the power switch immediately disconnect the power cord and contact the Canon Customer Care Center Do not attempt to disassemble or repair th...

Page 905: ...eaning the Feeder Cleaning the Feeder Automatically Replacing the toner cartridge See Replacing Toner Cartridges Adjusting the Machine Correcting Copy Images See Correcting Copy Images To adjust the density See Adjusting the Density To adjust whether to scan black text on color documents as B W or color See Adjusting Black Text in Color Documents Black Text Processing Adjustment in Color Documents...

Page 906: ...clean the components of the machine Cleaning the Exterior Cleaning the Fixing Unit Cleaning the Platen Glass Cleaning the Feeder Cleaning the Feeder Automatically Cleaning the Machine 㻥㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 907: ...itch and disconnect the power cord 2 Clean the exterior of the machine with a soft well wrung out cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water 3 Wait for the machine to dry completely before reconnecting the power cord and turn ON the power Cleaning the Exterior 㻥㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 908: ...he toner cartridge is replaced 1 Press Menu 2 Select Adjustment Maintenance using or and press OK 3 Select Clean Fixing Unit using or and press OK 4 Check if the supported paper is set in the paper drawer and press OK 5 Check the procedure shown in the display and press OK Cleaning the Fixing Unit 㻥㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 909: ...press OK The cleaning begins It takes approximately 80 seconds to complete the process We recommend that plain paper be loaded when cleaning the fixing unit When the cleaning does not start You cannot use this function when jobs are stored in memory 8 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻥㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 910: ...power cord 2 Open the feeder 3 Clean the platen glass and the under surface of the feeder 1 Clean the areas with a cloth dampened with water 2 Wipe the areas with a soft dry cloth IMPORTANT Precaution when cleaning the platen glass Take care not to bend the clear sheet A at the left edge of the platen glass Cleaning the Platen Glass 㻥㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 911: ...4 Close the feeder 5 Connect the power cord and turn ON the power switch 㻥㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 912: ...he feeder may be dirty Clean the feeder s scanning area and rollers 1 Turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the power cord 2 Open the feeder cover 3 Clean the rollers A inside the feeder with a well wrung out cloth dampened with water and wipe them with a soft dry cloth 4 Close the feeder cover Cleaning the Feeder 㻥㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 913: ...ith water 2 Wipe with a soft dry cloth IMPORTANT Precaution when cleaning the platen glass Take care not to bend the clear sheet A at the left edge of the platen glass 6 Close the feeder 7 Connect the power cord and turn ON the power switch 㻥㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 914: ...s Menu 2 Select Adjustment Maintenance using or and press OK 3 Select Clean Feeder using or and press OK 4 Load 10 sheets of A4 or Letter size plain paper in the feeder and then press OK The cleaning begins It takes approximately 44 seconds to complete the process 5 Press Menu to close the menu screen Cleaning the Feeder Automatically 㻥㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 915: ...en closing the feeder Be careful not to get your fingers caught Precautions to take when you get toner onto your hands or into clothing If toner comes in contact with your hands or clothing wash them immediately in cold water Do not use warm water as it will set the toner and make it difficult to remove the toner stains NOTE About sending or receiving faxes When the power plug is unplugged the mac...

Page 916: ...un a message appears on the screen Message When the message is displayed on the screen Description and Solutions Prepare toner cartridge When the toner cartridge needs a replacement soon Shake the toner cartridge to evenly distribute the toner inside the cartridge Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge We recommend that the toner cartridge be replaced before printing high volume documents Replacing ...

Page 917: ... condition may not be improved When this problem occurs Follow the steps in the procedure below before replacing the toner cartridge The machine continues printing until the toner runs out completely Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge When the print quality is still unacceptable If the problem persists after you have followed the steps in the procedure below replace the toner cartridge Replacing...

Page 918: ...er cartridge The machine continues printing until the toner runs out completely 1 Open the front cover while holding down the open button 2 Remove the toner cartridge 3 Gently shake the toner cartridge five or six times to evenly distribute the toner inside the cartridge Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge 㻥㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 919: ...ine 5 Close the front cover If you cannot close the front cover Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed correctly Do not try to forcefully close the toner cover as this may damage the machine If there are white lines in the print result or it is blurred or distorted even though the above operations have been performed replace the toner cartridge with a new one Replacing the Toner Cartridge...

Page 920: ...er cartridge 3 Take out the new toner cartridge from the protective bag You can open the protective bag with your hands from the notch Store the protective bag It is required when you remove the toner cartridge for the machine maintenance or other purposes Replacing the Toner Cartridge 㻥㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 921: ...pe at an angle or up and down If the tape breaks it may not be pulled out completely If the sealing tape is still hanging outside the toner cartridge pull it out completely If the tape remains inside the toner cartridge it may cause poor print quality If you are using the Fax please note that you can only print the received data once because the received data is deleted once it is printed Dispose ...

Page 922: ...ge into the machine until the toner cartridge comes to rest and is held against the back of the machine 8 Close the front cover If you cannot close the front cover Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed correctly Do not try to forcefully close the toner cover as this may damage the machine 㻥㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 923: ...ou are using the Fax please note that you can only print the received data once because the received data is deleted once it is printed If toner gets into your eyes or mouth flush them immediately with cold water and consult a physician IMPORTANT About replacement toner cartridges For optimum print quality using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended Model Name Supported Canon Genuine Toner...

Page 924: ...n the toner cartridge if it is brought into an environment that exposes it to sudden changes in temperature and or humidity If you move the toner cartridge to a location that is warmer or has higher humidity leave the cartridge in the new location for 2 hours or longer without opening the protective bag to allow it to adjust to the new temperature Do not leave the front cover open for a long time ...

Page 925: ...ting the received fax if the toner cartridge is not replaced Note that the output may not be clear as subtle details such as thin lines and light colors may not be clearly reproduced due to a small amount of toner remaining inside the toner cartridge Plus the data is deleted once it has been printed Continue Printing When Toner Is Low 㻥㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 926: ...nt settings in detail Correcting Copy Images Adjusting the Density Adjusting Black Text in Color Documents Black Text Processing Adjustment in Color Documents Adjusting the Machine 㻥㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 927: ...re no jobs which use the scanner functions and printer functions The following paper is loaded in the paper drawer Paper Size A4 or Letter Paper Type Plain paper or Recycled paper Sheets of paper 1 sheets or more If you execute copy image adjustment with running out toner Even you try to perform the adjustment the image may not be improved Change the toner cartridge and redo the adjustment Replaci...

Page 928: ... the auto gradation adjustment follow the two procedures print scan displayed on the screen A test chart adj image 1 is printed 6 Open the feeder when the screen displayed during the printing disappears 7 Place the printed paper on the platen glass with the print side face down Set the black stripe A on the left side 㻥㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 929: ...be performed properly If Adjustment failed appears Is the paper loaded correctly ĺ Load plain paper or recycled paper of A4 Letter size in the paper drawer Is the test chart placed on the platen glass correctly ĺ Place the test chart on the platen glass with the printing side face down and Set the black stripe on the left side 㻥㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 930: ...med paper 10 When the correction is complete the screen in Step 3 reappears Press Menu to close the menu screen 11 Remove the test chart adjusted image 1 placed on the platen glass in Step 7 㻥㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 931: ...ion cannot be performed properly Check the temperature of the installation site If the room temperature is too low correction may not be performed properly NOTE Copy image correction time Approximately 40 seconds Attention Correcting Copy Images 㻥㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 932: ...ing reports 1 Press Menu 2 Select Adjustment Maintenance using or and press OK 3 Select Printer Density using or and press OK 4 Adjust the density using or and press OK Makes the density lighter Makes the density darker 5 Press Menu to close the menu screen Adjusting the Density 㻥㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 933: ...justment Maintenance using or and press OK 3 Select Black Text Processing for Color using or and press OK 4 Select a scanning area to be adjusted using or and press OK 5 Adjust using or and press OK Adjusting Black Text in Color Documents Black Text Processing Adjustment in Color Documents 㻥㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 934: ... Text more easily detected as color Text more easily detected as black and white 6 Press Menu to close the menu screen 㻥㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 935: ...g The improvement effect is increased in the following order Off Mode 1 Mode 2 low high Paper curls and creases can be minimized by changing the paper type and usage conditions without needing to change the setting The more effective the setting becomes the slower the print speed Special Mode X only for media printing and printing from PS PCL printer driver Off Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Depending on th...

Page 936: ...vironment liner stains may not appear on the printed paper without any setting If you turn On this item the printing speed will be reduced Special Mode C only for printing received fax and report printing Off On Due to the paper type or usage conditions vertical streaks appear on the output When this occurs set one of the following settings to On Noise can also be minimized Streaks can be minimize...

Page 937: ...appear on the output When this occurs change this setting The effect becomes greater as the number goes up Off Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 low high Streaks can be minimized by changing the paper type or usage conditions without needing to change the setting The more effective the setting becomes the lower the density Additionally the outline of text and images may be reproduced less clearly and images ma...

Page 938: ...OTE For the instructions on how to access the printer driver screen see Printing and Configuring the Default Print Settings 2 Click Advanced Settings 㻥㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 939: ... the cables and cord USB cable 2 Turn the computer off 3 Remove it from the machine LAN cable 4 Remove it from the machine Power cord 5 Unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet 6 Remove it from the machine Telephone cables 7 Remove it from the machine Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your environment 2 If you are using the multi purpose tray close it Relocating the M...

Page 940: ...ne Check the weight of the machine so it can be carried safely When the optional paper feeder is installed Remove the paper feeder from the machine install it in the new installation site then transport the machine Do not carry the machine with the paper feeder installed If you do so the paper feeder may drop resulting in personal injury 㻥㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 941: ...ge to the machine during transport perform the following Remove the toner cartridges See also Storing Toner Cartridges Securely pack the machine in the original box with packing materials If the original box and packing materials are not available find an appropriate box along with packing materials and pack the machine and the parts appropriately 㻥㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manua...

Page 942: ...ords resulting in a fire or electrical shock CAUTION Set the machine down slowly and carefully Be careful not to hurt your hands or fingers IMPORTANT Do not carry the machine with the covers or trays open Make sure that the scanning platform and paper drawer are closed before lifting carrying and relocating the machine Attention Relocating the Machine 㻥㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com M...

Page 943: ...0FR4 0S6 Basic Windows Operations For Macintosh Users Appendix 㻥㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 944: ...s 8 and Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen select Control Panel and then click View devices and printers How to Display the Scanners and Cameras or Scanners and Cameras Properties Screen Windows XP From the Start menu select Control Panel and click Printers and Other Hardware Scanners and Cameras Windows Vista From the Start menu select Control Panel and click Hardware and...

Page 945: ... Server 2008 1 Enter D Minst exe in Search programs and files or Start Search under the Start menu 2 Press the ENTER key on the keyboard Windows 8 and Server 2012 1 Right click the lower left corner of the screen and select Run 2 Enter D Minst exe and then click OK How to Check the Windows Vista 7 8 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Processor Version 1 Open Control Panel Windows Vista Windows 7 Server 20...

Page 946: ...3 Check the Processor Version For 32 bit versions 32 bit Operating System is displayed For 64 bit versions 64 bit Operating System is displayed 㻥㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 947: ...S PROVIDED HEREIN INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THEREOF WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON INFRINGEMENT CANON INC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL Disclaimers 㻥㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 948: ...scribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of Canon Inc Copyright 㻥㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 949: ...PowerPoint are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST under license from Monotype Imaging Inc UFST is a trademark of Monotype Imaging Inc registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions UFST Copyright...

Page 950: ...enkerkerweg 59 1185 XB Amstelveen The Netherlands CANON CHINA CO LTD 15F Jinbao Building No 89 Jinbao Street Dongcheng District Beijing 100005 PRC CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD 1 HarbourFront Avenue 04 01 Keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 1 Thomas Holt Drive North Ryde Sydney NSW 2113 Australia CANON GLOBAL WORLDWIDE SITES http www canon com Contact Us 㻥㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from M...

Page 951: ...M Canon MF Printer Driver Guide ĺ Documents Print XXXXXX Guide index html Canon PS Printer Driver Guide ĺ Documents Print PS XXXXXX Guide index html Canon Fax Driver Guide ĺ Documents FAX XXXXXX Guide index html Canon Scanner Driver Guide ĺ Documents Scan XXXXXX Guide index html Select the language you want to view for XXXXXX Displaying a Driver s Help System You can use drivers help systems after...

Page 952: ...res Examples Operating in the print server environment Watermark printing PageComposer Combining and printing multiple files For information on the features that are available on the Macintosh see the Printer Driver Guide Reference in the e Manual Printing Documents from a Computer Some scan features Examples Creating a Searchable PDF Combine multiple data into a single PDF file For information on...

Page 953: ...ories You can search the desired description by clicking the category icon on the top page Top Page Searching from the table of contents The contents page shows the table of contents Click the content that you want to display Site map Page Full text search function The function provides keyword searching Type in a keyword or phrase in the keyword text field or search box Search results to match yo...

Page 954: ... Click the following links to see the system requirements and learn how to use the e Manual System Requirements Starting the e Manual How to Use the e Manual 㻥㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 955: ... 3 x 4 x 5 x 6 x 7 x 8 x 9 x 10 x 11 x 12 x 13 x 14 x 15 x 16 x 17 x 18 x 19 x Mac OS Safari 3 x 4 x 5 0 5 1 6 0 Firefox 2 x 3 x 4 x 5 x 6 x 7 x 8 x 9 x 10 x 11 x 12 x 13 x 14 x 15 x 16 x 17 x 18 x 19 x NOTE Java scripting Enable Java scripting in your browser before using the e Manual System Requirements 㻥㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 956: ... e Manual Directly from the DVD ROM You can also display the e Manual directly from the DVD ROM without installing it in the computer you are using 1 Insert the User Software and Manuals DVD ROM into the slot on your computer 2 Click Manuals 3 Click e Manual Depending on the operating system you are using a security protection message appears Allow the contents to be displayed Starting the e Manua...

Page 957: ... main contents The Site map Page is the page that you can access by clicking Site map in the upper right side of each page Search can be performed with the search panel The screen layout varies across the page For more information click the following links Top Page Topic Page Site map Page Search Method Screen Layout of the e Manual 㻥㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 958: ...ink to the selected content to describe how to troubleshoot problems and maintain the machine 5 Top Return to the Top page 6 Site map Provide the link to the Contents page to show the table of contents 7 Help Provide tips to use the e Manual efficiently 8 Glossary Display the glossary of terms used in the e Manual 9 Search Enter a keyword in this field and click The search box appears For more inf...

Page 959: ... 15 Office Locations Display the contact information for inquiries 㻥㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 960: ... appears Clicking on the link moves you to the upper level 3 Chapter menu Select different chapters from the drop down menu 4 Contents Select different categories from the drop down menu 5 Search Click to search the desired information with the keywords For more information see Search Method 6 Click to fold the Contents and Search panel 7 Previous Next Click to move to the previous or next categor...

Page 961: ...e topic categories in the e Manual Click a category to view the list of topics 2 Whole contents Show all contents in the e Manual Click a heading to view the topic Site map Page 㻥㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 962: ...he keywords toner and message 2 Search result Display search results Click or the page number at the bottom of the page to move through search results when your search produces more than 10 results 3 Search options Click here to limit your search to a specific category Specify the search conditions such as chapter scope to search case sensitive or differentiation between one byte and two byte To s...

Page 963: ...ification of an operation or contains additional explanations for a procedure Reading these notes is highly recommended Indicates an operation that must not be performed Read these items carefully and make sure not to perform the described operations Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual The e Manual uses the following keys and buttons Type Description style used in the manual Example Operation pan...

Page 964: ...g system Windows Vista Microsoft Windows 7 operating system Windows 7 Microsoft Windows 8 operating system Windows 8 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 Microsoft Windows operating system Windows 㻥㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻥㻢㻠 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 965: ...㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 966: ...ded from the Canon Homepage 41 Installing the MF Drivers on the WSD Network For Windows 42 Installing the MF Drivers 43 Setting WSD 50 Uninstalling the Software 52 Uninstalling the Printer Fax Scanner Driver For Windows 53 Uninstalling the MF Toolbox For Windows 55 Uninstalling the Drivers for the WSD Device For Windows 57 Uninstalling the Product Extended Survey Program For Windows 60 Uninstallin...

Page 967: ...d this chapter before installing the software such as the MF Drivers About the Drivers and Software Supported Operating Systems Selecting the Driver to Be Installed Before Using the Driver 㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 968: ...nned image in an application send it as an e mail attachment file store it on the hard disk etc Additional Software Program Canon MF LBP Wireless Setup Assistant You can check the SSID the network key etc when connecting to a wireless LAN using Canon MF LBP Wireless Setup Assistant Presto PageManager 3 You can handle scanned images in many ways using this software 1 Fax driver may not be supplied ...

Page 969: ... 3 1 1 1 Printer driver PCL6 3 1 1 1 Printer driver PS 3 1 1 1 Fax driver 3 1 1 1 Scanner driver Network Scan Utility 1 1 MF Toolbox Canon MF LBP Wireless Setup Assistant 3 2 2 2 2 2 Presto PageManager 3 1 Supported only over network connection 2 Supported only over wireless LAN connection 3 These software may not be supplied depending on your model or your country or region Supported Operating Sy...

Page 970: ...or to highlight System Settings and then press OK 3 Press or to highlight Select PDL Plug n Play and then press OK 4 Press or to highlight Network or USB and then press OK 5 Press or to highlight the printer driver you are using and then press OK Selecting the Driver to Be Installed 㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 971: ...PS PCL5 PCL6 PS The options to be displayed differ depending on your country or region 6 Restart the machine It is necessary to restart the machine for the settings to take effect Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 972: ...ers Installing the Drivers Downloaded from the Canon Homepage Connect the USB cable after installing the MF drivers If you connected the USB cable before installing the MF drivers refer to The USB cable was connected before installing the MF drivers Presto PageManager is not installed by selecting Easy Installation To install the software select Custom Installation If you are operating in the IPv6...

Page 973: ... click OK Windows Vista 7 and Server 2008 1 Enter D MInst exe in Start Search or Search programs and files under the Start menu 2 Press the ENTER key on the keyboard Windows 8 and Server 2012 1 Right click the lower left corner of the screen and select Run 2 Enter D MInst exe and then click OK The CD ROM or DVD ROM drive name is indicated as D in this manual The CD ROM or DVD ROM drive name may di...

Page 974: ...creen appears select the connection to a computer For USB Connection Select USB Connection and click Next For Network Connection Select Network Connection and click Next NOTE Windows Server 2003 Server 2008 Server 2012 This screen is not displayed Proceed to the following procedure 4 Click Install 㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 975: ...The options to be displayed differ depending on your country or region 5 Read the License Agreement and click Yes 6 Click Next 㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 976: ...n Proceed to step 9 For Network Connection Proceed to step 7 7 Select the machine to be installed 1 Select the machine 2 Click Next If no machines are displayed in Device List Perform the following procedure 㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 977: ...onfirming IP Address Settings If the IP address of the machine is between 169 254 1 0 and 169 254 254 255 the IP address is the one assigned by the AutoIP function If an IP address other than link local addresses is set for the computer set an IP address in the same subnet as the computer other than link local addresses also for this machine manually This enables the installer to search for this m...

Page 978: ...installation of MF Toolbox starts In Windows Server 2003 Server 2008 Server 2012 MF Toolbox is not installed Proceed to step 12 10 Click Start 11 Click Exit 㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 979: ...ng on your environment If you select Accept The Product Extended Survey Program the program to investigate the state of usage will be installed The Product Extended Survey Program is the program to send the information related to the usage of this machine to Canon every month for ten years Any other information including your personal information is not sent You can also uninstall the Product Exte...

Page 980: ... 2 Click Restart Remove the CD ROM or DVD ROM once this screen appears The options to be displayed differ depending on your country or region In the case of USB connection wait until your computer is restarted USB Cable Connection Only when Connecting with USB In the case of network connection check the installation results Checking the Installation Results For Windows 㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from Manu...

Page 981: ...click OK Windows Vista 7 and Server 2008 1 Enter D MInst exe in Start Search or Search programs and files under the Start menu 2 Press the ENTER key on the keyboard Windows 8 and Server 2012 1 Right click the lower left corner of the screen and select Run 2 Enter D MInst exe and then click OK The CD ROM or DVD ROM drive name is indicated as D in this manual The CD ROM or DVD ROM drive name may dif...

Page 982: ...thod to a computer For USB Connection Select USB Connection and click Next For Network Connection Select Network Connection and click Next NOTE Windows Server 2003 Server 2008 Server 2012 This screen is not displayed Proceed to the following procedure 4 Select the check box next to the application you want to install and click Install 㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 983: ...The options to be displayed differ depending on your country or region 5 Read the License Agreement and click Yes 6 Click Next 㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 984: ...uter and machine are on the same subnet Security software has been exited 2 Click Update Device List If any machines are not displayed by performing the above procedure perform the following procedure 1 Click Search by IP Address 2 Enter the IP address of the machine to be installed Confirming IP Address Settings If the IP address of the machine is between 169 254 1 0 and 169 254 254 255 the IP ad...

Page 985: ...rint function Fax for Supported Models Select when using the PC fax function This function sends documents or images that were created on a computer directly as a fax transmission Scanner Select when using the scan function If another Select Driver screen is displayed repeat this step until the Confirm Settings screen is displayed 9 Set the printer or fax information 1 Specify the settings for eac...

Page 986: ...ation from a network for a client computer on which any of the following 32 bit operating systems is running is not supported due to a Windows restriction Windows XP on which no service pack or SP1 is installed Windows Server 2003 on which no service pack is installed If you download and install the software on any of the above 32 bit operating systems you may fail to install the software If any o...

Page 987: ...machine you would like to make your default printer 2 Click Next This screen appears only when installing the printer driver and fax driver 12 Select to print a test page 1 Select the check box to print a test page 2 Click Next This screen appears only when installing the printer driver and fax driver 㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 988: ...x starts In any of the following cases MF Toolbox is not installed If you are using Windows Server 2003 Server 2008 Server 2012 Proceed to step 18 If you did not select the MF Toolbox check box in step 4 Proceed to step 16 14 Click Next 㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 989: ... was selected in step 4 is installed Follow the on screen instructions If you are using the iR1133 Series the manuals and Product Extended Survey Program are not installed Proceed to step 18 16 If you selected Manuals in step 4 installation of the manuals starts Follow on screen instructions to install the manual 17 When the following screen appears read the displayed information click Accept or D...

Page 990: ...ur personal information is not sent You can also uninstall the Product Extended Survey Program Uninstalling the Product Extended Survey Program For Windows 18 Confirm that the applications are selected under Install and click Next The options to be displayed differ depending on your country or region 19 Restart your computer 1 Select the Restart Computer Now Recommended check box 2 Click Restart R...

Page 991: ...he case of USB connection wait until your computer is restarted USB Cable Connection Only when Connecting with USB In the case of network connection check the installation results Checking the Installation Results For Windows 㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 992: ...and Fax For Macintosh The installation screen varies depending on the version of Mac OS X Be sure to close all applications that are running 1 Insert the User Software CD ROM into the slot on your computer 2 Double click the CD ROM icon and then double click the Canon_MF_Driver pkg icon 3 Click Continue Installing the Software For Macintosh 㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 993: ...4 Read the License Agreement and click Continue 5 Click Agree 6 When the following screen appears click Continue 㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 994: ...all The Change Install Location button may appear but you cannot change the installation location 8 Enter your Name and Password and click OK If you are using Mac OS X 10 7 x or later click Install Software 㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 995: ...k Close In the case of USB connection proceed to USB Cable Connection Only when Connecting with USB In the case of network connection proceed to Registering the Printer and Fax For Macintosh 㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 996: ...re end b to the USB port on the machine If a dialog box is displayed Follow the on screen instructions and complete installation In the case of Windows check the installation results Checking the Installation Results For Windows In the case of Macintosh registering the machine is required Registering the Printer and Fax For Macintosh USB Cable Connection Only when Connecting with USB 㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downl...

Page 997: ...ed depending on the operating system Software Location Icon Printer driver Printers and Faxes Printers or Devices and Printers folder Fax driver Printers and Faxes Printers or Devices and Printers folder Scanner driver Scanners and Cameras or Scanners and Cameras Properties folder For network connection For USB connection MF Toolbox Desktop Network Scan Utility Taskbar e Manual Desktop Checking th...

Page 998: ...he MF Toolbox For details see the Canon Scanner Driver Guide Connection method Registration method Auto IP Bonjour Bonjour Connection TCP IP connection TCP IP Connection USB connection USB Connection Bonjour Connection 1 Open System Preferences and click Printer Fax or Print Scan 2 Click the icon 3 Click Default and then select a printer name for which Bonjour is displayed in the Kind or Connectio...

Page 999: ...at is capable for this machine from the driver list and then click OK If you are using Mac OS X 10 5 x clicking OK is not required 6 Click Add 7 Check that this machine is added to the Printer Fax or Print Scan dialog box 㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1000: ...tively following the procedure below The fax driver cannot be used in an IPv6 environment 1 Open System Preferences and click Printer Fax or Print Scan 2 Click the icon 3 Click IP and then select a print protocol from Protocol 㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1001: ...t Using 5 Select a driver that is capable for this machine from the driver list and then click OK If you are using Mac OS X 10 5 x clicking OK is not required 6 Click Add 7 Check that this machine is added to the Printer Fax or Print Scan dialog box 㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1002: ...box USB Connection Register the printer and fax respectively following the procedure below 1 Open System Preferences and click Printer Fax or Print Scan 2 Click the icon 㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1003: ...rinter Software from Print Using 5 Select a driver that is capable for this machine from the driver list and then click OK If you are using Mac OS X 10 5 x clicking OK is not required 6 Click Add 7 Check that this machine is added to the Printer Fax or Print Scan dialog box 㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1004: ...8 Close the dialog box 㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1005: ...uble click Setup or Setup exe If the User Account Control screen appears click Yes or Continue 3 Follow the on screen instructions After the installation completes perform the following procedure In the case of Windows USB Cable Connection Only when Connecting with USB Checking the Installation Results For Windows In the case of Macintosh Registering the Printer and Fax For Macintosh Installing th...

Page 1006: ...D Web Services on Devices protocol To use WSD follow the procedures in both Installing the MF Drivers and Setting WSD IMPORTANT To enable or disable WSD Use the operation panel on the machine e Manual Selecting the Connection Method LPD RAW WSD Installing the MF Drivers on the WSD Network For Windows 㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1007: ...ws 7 Server 2008 From the Start menu select Devices and Printers For Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen select Control Panel and then click View devices and printers 2 Click Add a printer 3 Click Add a local printer Installing the MF Drivers 㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1008: ...Printer Port is displayed for Use an existing port and click Next 5 Click Have Disk 6 Insert the User Software and Manuals CD ROM or DVD ROM into the slot on your computer 㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1009: ...o close the dialog box 7 Click Browse 8 Open the folder where the printer driver files are stored For 32 bit versions Open DRIVERS us_eng or uk_eng 32bit Driver on the CD ROM or DVD ROM and click Open For 64 bit versions Open DRIVERS us_eng or uk_eng x64 Driver on the CD ROM or DVD ROM and click Open 㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1010: ...ch operating system that you are using on your computer How to Check the Bit Architecture For Windows 9 Click OK 10 Select the printer driver you are using and then click Next 㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1011: ...efault printer name When Set as default printer is displayed specify whether to choose the machine as the default printer Windows Vista Server 2008 2 Click Next Installation begins Wait until the following screen closes 㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1012: ...the related settings after you have performed the procedure provided in Setting WSD 13 Click Finish When Set as the default printer is displayed specify whether to choose the machine as the default printer Windows 7 8 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Eject the CD ROM or DVD ROM when the following screen appears 㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1013: ...The icon is added to the printer folder 㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1014: ...om the Start menu and click Network For Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen select File Explore and then click Network 2 Right click the machine icon and select Install from the pop up menu The icon is add to the printer folder Installation is complete Setting WSD 㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1015: ...below to delete the icon added in step 13 of Installing the MF Drivers if you do not need it 1 Right click the icon and select Remove device or Delete from the pop up menu 2 Click Yes 3 When User Account Control appears click Yes or Continue 㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1016: ...ows Uninstalling the Software For Macintosh Uninstalling the e Manual For Windows IMPORTANT Confirm the following before uninstalling the software You must have administrative privileges on the computer You should have the installation software in case you want to re install the drivers You have closed all applications on your computer desktop NOTE If you are using the iR1133 Series see the follow...

Page 1017: ...ck Uninstall a Program or double click Programs and Features For Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen and select Programs and Features 2 Select Canon MF6100 Series or Canon iR1133 Series and then click Uninstall 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes to confirm the uninstallation 5 Click Exit or Restart Uninstalling the Printer Fax Scanner Driver For Windows 㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded...

Page 1018: ...㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1019: ...From the Start menu select Control Panel 2 Click Uninstall a Program or double click Programs and Features For Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen and select Programs and Features 2 Select Canon MF Toolbox 4 9 and then click Uninstall 3 Click Remove 4 Click Exit Uninstalling the MF Toolbox For Windows 㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1020: ...㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1021: ...untry or region If AutoPlay is displayed click to close the dialog box 2 Open the folder that contains the uninstaller on the CD ROM or DVD ROM For 32 bit DRIVERS us_eng or uk_eng 32bit misc For 64 bit DRIVERS us_eng or uk_eng x64 misc 3 Double click DelDrv exe Uninstalling the Drivers for the WSD Device For Windows 㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1022: ...When User Account Control appears Click Yes or Continue 4 Click Delete 5 Click Yes 6 Click Exit 㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1023: ...lick the machine icon and select Uninstall from the pop up menu When User Account Control appears Click Yes or Continue The machine icon is deleted from the printer folder and uninstall is completed 㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1024: ...el 2 Click Uninstall a program or double click Programs and Features For Windows 8 Right click the lower left corner of the screen and select Programs and Features 2 Select Canon Laser Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program and then click Uninstall 3 Follow the on screen instructions Uninstalling the Product Extended Survey Program For Windows 㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manual...

Page 1025: ...ete the files or folders below that correspond to the driver you want to uninstall Drag files or folders to Trash icon on the Dock to delete If Authenticate dialog box appears enter the administrator s name and password and then click OK Software Location of the folder to enter Name of the file or folder to delete Printer driver Library Printers Canon CUPS_MF_Printer Library Printers PPDs Contents...

Page 1026: ...ort Canon WMCLibrary framework Library Application Support Canon WMCReb plist Library Image Capture Devices Canon MFScannerxxx app xxx may differ depending on the model Library Image Capture TWAIN Data Sources Canon xxx ds Canon xxx USB ds xxx may differ depending on the model Library Printers Canon MFScanner Library LaunchAgents jp co canon ScanGearMF appl Canon MF Scan Agent plist Max OS X 10 6 ...

Page 1027: ... select Run 2 Enter D MInst exe and then click OK Windows Vista 7 and Server 2008 1 Enter D MInst exe in Start Search or Search programs and files under the Start menu 2 Press the ENTER key on the keyboard Windows 8 and Server 2012 1 Right click the lower left corner of the screen and select Run 2 Enter D MInst exe and then click OK The CD ROM or DVD ROM drive name is indicated as D in this manual...

Page 1028: ... are using If the language selection screen is displayed before the CD ROM DVD ROM setup screen appears Select the language and click OK 3 Click Start for Manual Uninstaller 4 Follow on screen instructions 㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1029: ...ns Installed from the User Software and Manuals CD ROM or DVD ROM Supplied with the Machine Are Not Properly Registered in the MF Toolbox Applications are automatically registered to the MF Toolbox once they have been installed They are not however if installed while the MF Toolbox is open To access these applications from the toolbox you need to manually register them to the toolbox e Manual Usin...

Page 1030: ...e steps below to delete it and install the MF drivers 1 Right click the lower left corner of the screen select Control Panel and click View devices and printers 2 Right click the icon for the machine 3 Click Remove device 4 Remove the USB cable from the computer 5 Install the MF drivers Installing the MF Drivers and MF Toolbox For Windows 7 8 1 Remove the USB cable from the computer 2 Install the ...

Page 1031: ... Installing the MF Drivers and MF Toolbox 㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1032: ...u bar in the application 2 Select the printer in Select Printer or Name in the Print dialog box 3 Click Preferences or Properties 4 Click Help Searching from Contents Click Contents in the Help screen and then double click the desired title to display the information For Macintosh 1 Select File Print from the menu bar in the application 2 Select the printer in Printer 3 Change the content displaye...

Page 1033: ...How to display the Help screen Summary etc 4 Click Searching from Contents You can search a content by entering a keyword 㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1034: ...The machine may not be able to connect to a network even if your network settings are appropriate In this case the startup time of the machine needs to be set to a waiting state e Manual Specifying a Delay Before Establishing the Network Connection Confirming IPv4 address settings 1 Press Status Monitor Cancel 2 Press or to highlight Network Information and then press OK 3 Press or to highlight IP...

Page 1035: ...ncel to close the screen Confirming IPv6 address settings 1 Press Status Monitor Cancel 2 Press or to highlight Network Information and then press OK 3 Press or to highlight IPv6 and then press OK 4 㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1036: ...Press or to highlight the option you want to confirm and then press OK 5 View the information 6 Press Status Monitor Cancel to close the screen 㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1037: ...y System Windows Vista 7 8 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Click System and Maintenance or System and Security and then click System Windows Server 2008 Click System 3 Check the bit architecture For 32 bit versions 32 bit Operating System is displayed For 64 bit versions 64 bit Operating System is displayed How to Check the Bit Architecture For Windows 㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals...

Page 1038: ...AS PROVIDED HEREIN INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THEREOF WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON INFRINGEMENT CANON INC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL Disclaimers 㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1039: ...nscribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of Canon Inc Copyright 㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻢 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1040: ...r registered trademarks of Apple Inc in the U S and or other countries This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST under license from Monotype Imaging Inc UFST is a trademark of Monotype Imaging Inc registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions Copyright 1989 1996 1997 2003 2004 2008 all rights reserved by Monotyp...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands